hekeus@3
|
1 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
2 %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
|
hekeus@3
|
3 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
4 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
5 %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
|
hekeus@3
|
6 %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
|
hekeus@3
|
7 %% conferences.
|
hekeus@3
|
8 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
9 %% Support sites:
|
hekeus@3
|
10 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
|
hekeus@3
|
11 %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
|
hekeus@3
|
12 %% and
|
hekeus@3
|
13 %% http://www.ieee.org/
|
hekeus@3
|
14 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
15 %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
|
hekeus@3
|
16 %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
|
hekeus@3
|
17 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
18 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
19 %% Contributors:
|
hekeus@3
|
20 %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
|
hekeus@3
|
21 %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
|
hekeus@3
|
22 %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
|
hekeus@3
|
23 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
24 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
25 %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
|
hekeus@3
|
26 %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
|
hekeus@3
|
27 %% Juergen von Hagen
|
hekeus@3
|
28 %% and
|
hekeus@3
|
29 %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
|
hekeus@3
|
30 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
31 %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
|
hekeus@3
|
32 %% See:
|
hekeus@3
|
33 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/
|
hekeus@3
|
34 %% for current contact information.
|
hekeus@3
|
35 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
36 %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
hekeus@3
|
37 %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
|
hekeus@3
|
38 %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
|
hekeus@3
|
39 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
40 %%*************************************************************************
|
hekeus@3
|
41 %% Legal Notice:
|
hekeus@3
|
42 %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
|
hekeus@3
|
43 %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
|
hekeus@3
|
44 %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
|
hekeus@3
|
45 %% User assumes all risk.
|
hekeus@3
|
46 %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
|
hekeus@3
|
47 %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
|
hekeus@3
|
48 %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
|
hekeus@3
|
49 %% of any information contained here.
|
hekeus@3
|
50 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
51 %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
|
hekeus@3
|
52 %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
|
hekeus@3
|
53 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
54 %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
|
hekeus@3
|
55 %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
|
hekeus@3
|
56 %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
|
hekeus@3
|
57 %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
|
hekeus@3
|
58 %% 2003/12/01 or later.
|
hekeus@3
|
59 %% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
|
hekeus@3
|
60 %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
|
hekeus@3
|
61 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
|
hekeus@3
|
62 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
63 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
|
hekeus@3
|
64 %% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
|
hekeus@3
|
65 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
66 %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
|
hekeus@3
|
67 %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
|
hekeus@3
|
68 %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
|
hekeus@3
|
69 %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
|
hekeus@3
|
70 %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
|
hekeus@3
|
71 %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
|
hekeus@3
|
72 %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
|
hekeus@3
|
73 %% correct version information.
|
hekeus@3
|
74 %% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
|
hekeus@3
|
75 %%*************************************************************************
|
hekeus@3
|
76 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
77 %
|
hekeus@3
|
78 % Available class options
|
hekeus@3
|
79 % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
|
hekeus@3
|
80 %
|
hekeus@3
|
81 % *** choose only one from each category ***
|
hekeus@3
|
82 %
|
hekeus@3
|
83 % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
|
hekeus@3
|
84 % Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
|
hekeus@3
|
85 %
|
hekeus@3
|
86 % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
|
hekeus@3
|
87 % determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
|
hekeus@3
|
88 % correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
|
hekeus@3
|
89 % should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
|
hekeus@3
|
90 % journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
|
hekeus@3
|
91 % anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
|
hekeus@3
|
92 % repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
|
hekeus@3
|
93 % papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
|
hekeus@3
|
94 % automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
|
hekeus@3
|
95 % cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
|
hekeus@3
|
96 % not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
|
hekeus@3
|
97 % peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
|
hekeus@3
|
98 % as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
|
hekeus@3
|
99 % information can be easily seen on the cover page.
|
hekeus@3
|
100 % The default is journal.
|
hekeus@3
|
101 %
|
hekeus@3
|
102 % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
|
hekeus@3
|
103 % determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
|
hekeus@3
|
104 % handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
|
hekeus@3
|
105 % draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
|
hekeus@3
|
106 % packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
|
hekeus@3
|
107 % for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
|
hekeus@3
|
108 % draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
|
hekeus@3
|
109 % of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
|
hekeus@3
|
110 % also want to select onecolumn.
|
hekeus@3
|
111 % The default is final.
|
hekeus@3
|
112 %
|
hekeus@3
|
113 % letterpaper, a4paper
|
hekeus@3
|
114 % determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
|
hekeus@3
|
115 % SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
|
hekeus@3
|
116 % WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
|
hekeus@3
|
117 % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
|
hekeus@3
|
118 % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
|
hekeus@3
|
119 % margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
|
hekeus@3
|
120 % For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
|
hekeus@3
|
121 % paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing
|
hekeus@3
|
122 % (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
|
hekeus@3
|
123 % Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
|
hekeus@3
|
124 % IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex
|
hekeus@3
|
125 % (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
|
hekeus@3
|
126 % important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
|
hekeus@3
|
127 % dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
|
hekeus@3
|
128 % testflow documentation
|
hekeus@3
|
129 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
|
hekeus@3
|
130 % for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
|
hekeus@3
|
131 % The default is letterpaper.
|
hekeus@3
|
132 %
|
hekeus@3
|
133 % oneside, twoside
|
hekeus@3
|
134 % determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
|
hekeus@3
|
135 % printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
|
hekeus@3
|
136 % the pages.
|
hekeus@3
|
137 % The default is oneside.
|
hekeus@3
|
138 %
|
hekeus@3
|
139 % onecolumn, twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
140 % determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
|
hekeus@3
|
141 % column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
|
hekeus@3
|
142 % The default is twocolumn.
|
hekeus@3
|
143 %
|
hekeus@3
|
144 % compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
145 % Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
|
hekeus@3
|
146 %
|
hekeus@3
|
147 % romanappendices
|
hekeus@3
|
148 % Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
149 % now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
|
hekeus@3
|
150 % v1.6b and earlier did.
|
hekeus@3
|
151 %
|
hekeus@3
|
152 % captionsoff
|
hekeus@3
|
153 % disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
|
hekeus@3
|
154 % request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
|
hekeus@3
|
155 % of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
|
hekeus@3
|
156 % package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
|
hekeus@3
|
157 %
|
hekeus@3
|
158 % nofonttune
|
hekeus@3
|
159 % turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
|
hekeus@3
|
160 % not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
|
hekeus@3
|
161 % their fonts.
|
hekeus@3
|
162 % The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
|
hekeus@3
|
163 %
|
hekeus@3
|
164 %
|
hekeus@3
|
165 %----------
|
hekeus@3
|
166 % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
|
hekeus@3
|
167 % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
168 % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
|
hekeus@3
|
169 % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
|
hekeus@3
|
170 % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
|
hekeus@3
|
171 % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
|
hekeus@3
|
172 %
|
hekeus@3
|
173 % Available CLASSINFOs provided:
|
hekeus@3
|
174 % \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)
|
hekeus@3
|
175 % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)
|
hekeus@3
|
176 % \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)
|
hekeus@3
|
177 % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)
|
hekeus@3
|
178 % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
|
hekeus@3
|
179 %
|
hekeus@3
|
180 % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
|
hekeus@3
|
181 % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
|
hekeus@3
|
182 % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
hekeus@3
|
183 % point size options provided as a single macro:
|
hekeus@3
|
184 % \CLASSOPTIONpt
|
hekeus@3
|
185 % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
|
hekeus@3
|
186 % normalsize point size.
|
hekeus@3
|
187 % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
188 % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
189
|
hekeus@3
|
190
|
hekeus@3
|
191
|
hekeus@3
|
192
|
hekeus@3
|
193
|
hekeus@3
|
194 \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
|
hekeus@3
|
195 \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
|
hekeus@3
|
196 \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
|
hekeus@3
|
197 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
|
hekeus@3
|
198
|
hekeus@3
|
199 % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
|
hekeus@3
|
200 % These values serve as a way a .tex file can
|
hekeus@3
|
201 % determine if the new features are provided.
|
hekeus@3
|
202 % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
|
hekeus@3
|
203 % these values. i.e., V1.4
|
hekeus@3
|
204 % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
|
hekeus@3
|
205 % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
|
hekeus@3
|
206 \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
|
hekeus@3
|
207 \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
|
hekeus@3
|
208
|
hekeus@3
|
209 % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
210 \newif\if@restonecol
|
hekeus@3
|
211 \newif\if@titlepage
|
hekeus@3
|
212
|
hekeus@3
|
213
|
hekeus@3
|
214 % class option conditionals
|
hekeus@3
|
215 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
216 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
|
hekeus@3
|
217
|
hekeus@3
|
218 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
|
hekeus@3
|
219 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
220
|
hekeus@3
|
221 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
|
hekeus@3
|
222 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
223 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
224 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
225
|
hekeus@3
|
226 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
227 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
hekeus@3
|
228
|
hekeus@3
|
229 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
|
hekeus@3
|
230 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
231 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
232
|
hekeus@3
|
233 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
234
|
hekeus@3
|
235 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
|
hekeus@3
|
236
|
hekeus@3
|
237 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
238
|
hekeus@3
|
239 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
240
|
hekeus@3
|
241
|
hekeus@3
|
242 % class info conditionals
|
hekeus@3
|
243
|
hekeus@3
|
244 % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
|
hekeus@3
|
245 \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse
|
hekeus@3
|
246
|
hekeus@3
|
247
|
hekeus@3
|
248 % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
|
hekeus@3
|
249 \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
250
|
hekeus@3
|
251
|
hekeus@3
|
252
|
hekeus@3
|
253 % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
|
hekeus@3
|
254 % dimen
|
hekeus@3
|
255 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
hekeus@3
|
256 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
|
hekeus@3
|
257 % count
|
hekeus@3
|
258 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
hekeus@3
|
259 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
hekeus@3
|
260 % token list
|
hekeus@3
|
261 \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
hekeus@3
|
262
|
hekeus@3
|
263 % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
|
hekeus@3
|
264 % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
|
hekeus@3
|
265 % external packages
|
hekeus@3
|
266 \def\@ptsize{0}
|
hekeus@3
|
267 % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
|
hekeus@3
|
268 \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
hekeus@3
|
269 \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
|
hekeus@3
|
270 \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
271 \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
|
hekeus@3
|
272
|
hekeus@3
|
273
|
hekeus@3
|
274
|
hekeus@3
|
275 \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
|
hekeus@3
|
276 \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
|
hekeus@3
|
277 \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
278 \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
|
hekeus@3
|
279 \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
|
hekeus@3
|
280 \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
|
hekeus@3
|
281
|
hekeus@3
|
282
|
hekeus@3
|
283 \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
|
hekeus@3
|
284 \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
|
hekeus@3
|
285 \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
|
hekeus@3
|
286 \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
|
hekeus@3
|
287 \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
|
hekeus@3
|
288 \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
|
hekeus@3
|
289
|
hekeus@3
|
290 \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
291 \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
292 \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
|
hekeus@3
|
293 \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
294
|
hekeus@3
|
295 \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
296 \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
297
|
hekeus@3
|
298 % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
|
hekeus@3
|
299 % will go into draft mode.
|
hekeus@3
|
300 \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
hekeus@3
|
301 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
302 % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
|
hekeus@3
|
303 % used by the document.
|
hekeus@3
|
304 \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
hekeus@3
|
305 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
306 % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
|
hekeus@3
|
307 \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
|
hekeus@3
|
308 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
309 \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
310 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
311
|
hekeus@3
|
312 \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
hekeus@3
|
313 \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
314
|
hekeus@3
|
315 \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
hekeus@3
|
316 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
317
|
hekeus@3
|
318 \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
hekeus@3
|
319 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
320
|
hekeus@3
|
321 \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
|
hekeus@3
|
322 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
323
|
hekeus@3
|
324 \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
|
hekeus@3
|
325 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
326
|
hekeus@3
|
327 \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
328
|
hekeus@3
|
329 \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
330
|
hekeus@3
|
331 \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
332
|
hekeus@3
|
333 \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
334
|
hekeus@3
|
335
|
hekeus@3
|
336 % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
|
hekeus@3
|
337 \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
|
hekeus@3
|
338 % overrride these defaults per user requests
|
hekeus@3
|
339 \ProcessOptions
|
hekeus@3
|
340
|
hekeus@3
|
341
|
hekeus@3
|
342
|
hekeus@3
|
343 % Computer Society conditional execution command
|
hekeus@3
|
344 \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
345 % inverse
|
hekeus@3
|
346 \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
347 % compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
348 \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
349 % compsoc not conference
|
hekeus@3
|
350 \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
351
|
hekeus@3
|
352
|
hekeus@3
|
353 % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
|
hekeus@3
|
354 % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
|
hekeus@3
|
355 \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
|
hekeus@3
|
356 \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
|
hekeus@3
|
357 \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
|
hekeus@3
|
358
|
hekeus@3
|
359 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
|
hekeus@3
|
360
|
hekeus@3
|
361 % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
|
hekeus@3
|
362 % not Times Roman.
|
hekeus@3
|
363 \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
|
hekeus@3
|
364
|
hekeus@3
|
365 % enable Times/Palatino main text font
|
hekeus@3
|
366 \normalfont\selectfont
|
hekeus@3
|
367
|
hekeus@3
|
368
|
hekeus@3
|
369
|
hekeus@3
|
370
|
hekeus@3
|
371
|
hekeus@3
|
372 % V1.7 conference notice message hook
|
hekeus@3
|
373 \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
374 \typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
|
hekeus@3
|
375 \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
|
hekeus@3
|
376 \typeout{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
377 \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
|
hekeus@3
|
378 \typeout{ of your paper;}%
|
hekeus@3
|
379 \typeout{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
380 \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
|
hekeus@3
|
381 \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
|
hekeus@3
|
382 \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
383 \typeout{}}
|
hekeus@3
|
384
|
hekeus@3
|
385
|
hekeus@3
|
386 % we can send console reminder messages to the user here
|
hekeus@3
|
387 \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
388
|
hekeus@3
|
389
|
hekeus@3
|
390 % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
|
hekeus@3
|
391 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
392 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
393 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
394 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
395 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
396
|
hekeus@3
|
397
|
hekeus@3
|
398 % V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
|
hekeus@3
|
399 % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
|
hekeus@3
|
400 % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
|
hekeus@3
|
401 % even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
|
hekeus@3
|
402 % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
|
hekeus@3
|
403 {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
404 % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
|
hekeus@3
|
405 % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
|
hekeus@3
|
406 % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
|
hekeus@3
|
407 \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
|
hekeus@3
|
408 \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
|
hekeus@3
|
409 % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
|
hekeus@3
|
410 \ifcase\pdfoutput
|
hekeus@3
|
411 \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
412 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
413 % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
|
hekeus@3
|
414 \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
|
hekeus@3
|
415 \fi}}
|
hekeus@3
|
416
|
hekeus@3
|
417 % let the user know the selected papersize
|
hekeus@3
|
418 \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
|
hekeus@3
|
419 (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
|
hekeus@3
|
420
|
hekeus@3
|
421 \ifCLASSINFOpdf
|
hekeus@3
|
422 \typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
|
hekeus@3
|
423 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
424 \typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
|
hekeus@3
|
425 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
426
|
hekeus@3
|
427
|
hekeus@3
|
428 % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
|
hekeus@3
|
429 % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
|
hekeus@3
|
430 % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
|
hekeus@3
|
431 % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
|
hekeus@3
|
432 % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
|
hekeus@3
|
433 % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
|
hekeus@3
|
434 % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
|
hekeus@3
|
435 %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
436 %\def\@journal{}
|
hekeus@3
|
437
|
hekeus@3
|
438
|
hekeus@3
|
439
|
hekeus@3
|
440 % pointsize values
|
hekeus@3
|
441 % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
|
hekeus@3
|
442 \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
|
hekeus@3
|
443 \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
|
hekeus@3
|
444 \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
|
hekeus@3
|
445 \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
|
hekeus@3
|
446
|
hekeus@3
|
447
|
hekeus@3
|
448
|
hekeus@3
|
449 % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
|
hekeus@3
|
450 % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
|
hekeus@3
|
451 % revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
|
hekeus@3
|
452 % on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
|
hekeus@3
|
453 % normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)
|
hekeus@3
|
454 % 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)
|
hekeus@3
|
455 % 10pt 58 12pt (exact)
|
hekeus@3
|
456 % 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)
|
hekeus@3
|
457 % 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)
|
hekeus@3
|
458 %
|
hekeus@3
|
459
|
hekeus@3
|
460 % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
|
hekeus@3
|
461 % in case baselinestretch ever changes.
|
hekeus@3
|
462 % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
|
hekeus@3
|
463 \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
464 \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
465
|
hekeus@3
|
466 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
hekeus@3
|
467 \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
|
hekeus@3
|
468 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
469 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
470 \normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
471 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
472 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
473 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
474 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
|
hekeus@3
|
475 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
476 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
477 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
478 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
479 % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
|
hekeus@3
|
480 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
481 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
482 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
483 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
484 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
485 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
486 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
487
|
hekeus@3
|
488
|
hekeus@3
|
489 % Check if we have selected 10 points
|
hekeus@3
|
490 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
|
hekeus@3
|
491 \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
|
hekeus@3
|
492 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
493 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
494 \normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
495 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
496 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
497 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
498 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
|
hekeus@3
|
499 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
500 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
501 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
502 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
503 % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
|
hekeus@3
|
504 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
505 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
506 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
507 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
508 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
509 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
510 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
511
|
hekeus@3
|
512
|
hekeus@3
|
513 % Check if we have selected 11 points
|
hekeus@3
|
514 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
|
hekeus@3
|
515 \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
|
hekeus@3
|
516 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
517 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
518 \normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
519 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
520 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
521 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
522 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
|
hekeus@3
|
523 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
524 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
525 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
526 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
527 % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
|
hekeus@3
|
528 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
529 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
530 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
531 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
532 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
533 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
534 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
535
|
hekeus@3
|
536
|
hekeus@3
|
537 % Check if we have selected 12 points
|
hekeus@3
|
538 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
|
hekeus@3
|
539 \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
|
hekeus@3
|
540 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
541 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
542 \normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
543 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
544 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
545 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
546 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
|
hekeus@3
|
547 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
548 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
549 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
550 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
551 % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
|
hekeus@3
|
552 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
553 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
554 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
555 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
556 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
557 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
|
hekeus@3
|
558 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
559
|
hekeus@3
|
560
|
hekeus@3
|
561 % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
|
hekeus@3
|
562 % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
|
hekeus@3
|
563 % tolerance to turn off this warning
|
hekeus@3
|
564 \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
565 % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
|
hekeus@3
|
566
|
hekeus@3
|
567
|
hekeus@3
|
568 % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
|
hekeus@3
|
569 % technote
|
hekeus@3
|
570 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
hekeus@3
|
571 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
572 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
573 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
574 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
575
|
hekeus@3
|
576
|
hekeus@3
|
577 % V1.7
|
hekeus@3
|
578 % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
|
hekeus@3
|
579 % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
|
hekeus@3
|
580 % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
|
hekeus@3
|
581 \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
|
hekeus@3
|
582 \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
|
hekeus@3
|
583 \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
|
hekeus@3
|
584 \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
|
hekeus@3
|
585 \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
|
hekeus@3
|
586 \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
|
hekeus@3
|
587 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
|
hekeus@3
|
588 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
|
hekeus@3
|
589 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
590 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
591 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
|
hekeus@3
|
592 \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
593
|
hekeus@3
|
594
|
hekeus@3
|
595
|
hekeus@3
|
596
|
hekeus@3
|
597 % set the default \baselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
598 \def\baselinestretch{1}
|
hekeus@3
|
599 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
600 \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
|
hekeus@3
|
601 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
602
|
hekeus@3
|
603
|
hekeus@3
|
604 % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
605 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
606 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
607 \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
|
hekeus@3
|
608 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
|
hekeus@3
|
609 \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
hekeus@3
|
610 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
611
|
hekeus@3
|
612 \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
|
hekeus@3
|
613
|
hekeus@3
|
614
|
hekeus@3
|
615
|
hekeus@3
|
616
|
hekeus@3
|
617 % store the normalsize baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
618 \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
619 \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
620 % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
621 % we could save a register by giving the user access to
|
hekeus@3
|
622 % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
|
hekeus@3
|
623 % its read only internal status
|
hekeus@3
|
624 \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
625 \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
626 % store the nominal value of jot
|
hekeus@3
|
627 \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
|
hekeus@3
|
628 \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
629
|
hekeus@3
|
630 % set \jot
|
hekeus@3
|
631 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
632
|
hekeus@3
|
633
|
hekeus@3
|
634
|
hekeus@3
|
635
|
hekeus@3
|
636 % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
637 % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
|
hekeus@3
|
638 % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
|
hekeus@3
|
639 % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
|
hekeus@3
|
640 % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
|
hekeus@3
|
641 %
|
hekeus@3
|
642 % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
|
hekeus@3
|
643 %
|
hekeus@3
|
644 % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
|
hekeus@3
|
645 % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
|
hekeus@3
|
646 % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
|
hekeus@3
|
647 % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
|
hekeus@3
|
648 % 35% nominal
|
hekeus@3
|
649 % 23% minimum
|
hekeus@3
|
650 % 50% maximum
|
hekeus@3
|
651 % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
|
hekeus@3
|
652 %
|
hekeus@3
|
653 % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
|
hekeus@3
|
654 % 37.5% nominal
|
hekeus@3
|
655 % 23% minimum
|
hekeus@3
|
656 % 55% maximum
|
hekeus@3
|
657
|
hekeus@3
|
658 % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
|
hekeus@3
|
659 % for medium (normal weight)
|
hekeus@3
|
660 \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
|
hekeus@3
|
661 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
|
hekeus@3
|
662 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
|
hekeus@3
|
663
|
hekeus@3
|
664 % for bold
|
hekeus@3
|
665 \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
|
hekeus@3
|
666 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
|
hekeus@3
|
667 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
|
hekeus@3
|
668
|
hekeus@3
|
669
|
hekeus@3
|
670 % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
|
hekeus@3
|
671 % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
|
hekeus@3
|
672 % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
|
hekeus@3
|
673 % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
|
hekeus@3
|
674 % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
|
hekeus@3
|
675 % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
|
hekeus@3
|
676 \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
|
hekeus@3
|
677 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
|
hekeus@3
|
678 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
hekeus@3
|
679 \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
680 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
hekeus@3
|
681 \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
682 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
hekeus@3
|
683 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
|
hekeus@3
|
684 \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
|
hekeus@3
|
685
|
hekeus@3
|
686 % revise the interword spacing for each font weight
|
hekeus@3
|
687 \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
hekeus@3
|
688 \mdseries
|
hekeus@3
|
689 \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
|
hekeus@3
|
690 \bfseries
|
hekeus@3
|
691 \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
|
hekeus@3
|
692 }}
|
hekeus@3
|
693
|
hekeus@3
|
694 % revise the interword spacing for each font shape
|
hekeus@3
|
695 % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
|
hekeus@3
|
696 % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
|
hekeus@3
|
697 % won't alter these either.
|
hekeus@3
|
698 \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
|
hekeus@3
|
699 \normalfont
|
hekeus@3
|
700 \@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
701 \normalfont\itshape
|
hekeus@3
|
702 \@@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
703 }}
|
hekeus@3
|
704
|
hekeus@3
|
705 % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
|
hekeus@3
|
706 % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
|
hekeus@3
|
707 % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
|
hekeus@3
|
708 \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
|
hekeus@3
|
709 \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
710 \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
711 \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
712 \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
713 \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
714 \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
715 \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
716 \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
717 \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
|
hekeus@3
|
718 \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
|
hekeus@3
|
719
|
hekeus@3
|
720 % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
721 % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
|
hekeus@3
|
722 % sure all the default fonts are loaded
|
hekeus@3
|
723 \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
|
hekeus@3
|
724 \@IEEEtunefonts
|
hekeus@3
|
725 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
726
|
hekeus@3
|
727 % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
|
hekeus@3
|
728 \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
729
|
hekeus@3
|
730
|
hekeus@3
|
731
|
hekeus@3
|
732 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
733 % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
|
hekeus@3
|
734 % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
|
hekeus@3
|
735 % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
|
hekeus@3
|
736 % warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
|
hekeus@3
|
737 % but the appearance will be much better "right out
|
hekeus@3
|
738 % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
|
hekeus@3
|
739 % TeX default is 50
|
hekeus@3
|
740 \hyphenpenalty=750
|
hekeus@3
|
741 % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
|
hekeus@3
|
742 % The TeX default is 1000
|
hekeus@3
|
743 \hbadness=1350
|
hekeus@3
|
744 % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
|
hekeus@3
|
745 \frenchspacing
|
hekeus@3
|
746
|
hekeus@3
|
747 % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
|
hekeus@3
|
748 \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
|
hekeus@3
|
749 \relpenalty=800 % default 500
|
hekeus@3
|
750
|
hekeus@3
|
751
|
hekeus@3
|
752 % margin note stuff
|
hekeus@3
|
753 \marginparsep 10pt
|
hekeus@3
|
754 \marginparwidth 20pt
|
hekeus@3
|
755 \marginparpush 25pt
|
hekeus@3
|
756
|
hekeus@3
|
757
|
hekeus@3
|
758 % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
|
hekeus@3
|
759 \lineskip 0pt
|
hekeus@3
|
760 \normallineskip 0pt
|
hekeus@3
|
761 \lineskiplimit 0pt
|
hekeus@3
|
762 \normallineskiplimit 0pt
|
hekeus@3
|
763
|
hekeus@3
|
764 % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
|
hekeus@3
|
765 % footline
|
hekeus@3
|
766 \footskip 0.4in
|
hekeus@3
|
767
|
hekeus@3
|
768 % normally zero, should be relative to font height.
|
hekeus@3
|
769 % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
|
hekeus@3
|
770 \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
|
hekeus@3
|
771
|
hekeus@3
|
772 \parindent 1.0em
|
hekeus@3
|
773
|
hekeus@3
|
774 \topmargin -49.0pt
|
hekeus@3
|
775 \headheight 12pt
|
hekeus@3
|
776 \headsep 0.25in
|
hekeus@3
|
777
|
hekeus@3
|
778 % use the normal font baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
779 % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
780 \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
781 \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt
|
hekeus@3
|
782 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
hekeus@3
|
783 % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used
|
hekeus@3
|
784 % to determine these values.
|
hekeus@3
|
785 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
786 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
787 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
788 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
789
|
hekeus@3
|
790
|
hekeus@3
|
791 \columnsep 1pc
|
hekeus@3
|
792 \textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
|
hekeus@3
|
793
|
hekeus@3
|
794
|
hekeus@3
|
795 % the default side margins are equal
|
hekeus@3
|
796 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
hekeus@3
|
797 \oddsidemargin 14.32mm
|
hekeus@3
|
798 \evensidemargin 14.32mm
|
hekeus@3
|
799 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
800 \oddsidemargin 0.680in
|
hekeus@3
|
801 \evensidemargin 0.680in
|
hekeus@3
|
802 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
803 % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
|
hekeus@3
|
804 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
805 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
806
|
hekeus@3
|
807
|
hekeus@3
|
808
|
hekeus@3
|
809 % adjust margins for conference mode
|
hekeus@3
|
810 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
811 \topmargin -0.25in
|
hekeus@3
|
812 % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
|
hekeus@3
|
813 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
hekeus@3
|
814 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
hekeus@3
|
815 \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
|
hekeus@3
|
816 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
hekeus@3
|
817 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
818 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
819 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
820 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
821 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
822
|
hekeus@3
|
823
|
hekeus@3
|
824 % compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
825 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
826 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
827 % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
|
hekeus@3
|
828 \columnsep 0.375in
|
hekeus@3
|
829 % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
|
hekeus@3
|
830 \topmargin 0in
|
hekeus@3
|
831 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
|
hekeus@3
|
832 % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
|
hekeus@3
|
833 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
hekeus@3
|
834 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
hekeus@3
|
835 \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt)
|
hekeus@3
|
836 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
|
hekeus@3
|
837 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
838 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
839 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
840 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page
|
hekeus@3
|
841 \textwidth 6.5in
|
hekeus@3
|
842 % the default side margins are equal
|
hekeus@3
|
843 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
|
hekeus@3
|
844 \oddsidemargin 22.45mm
|
hekeus@3
|
845 \evensidemargin 22.45mm
|
hekeus@3
|
846 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
847 \oddsidemargin 1in
|
hekeus@3
|
848 \evensidemargin 1in
|
hekeus@3
|
849 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
850 % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
|
hekeus@3
|
851 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
852 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
853 \fi\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
854
|
hekeus@3
|
855
|
hekeus@3
|
856
|
hekeus@3
|
857 % draft mode settings override that of all other modes
|
hekeus@3
|
858 % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
|
hekeus@3
|
859 % space between the lines for editor's comments
|
hekeus@3
|
860 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
861 % want 1in from top of paper to text
|
hekeus@3
|
862 \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
863 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
|
hekeus@3
|
864 % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
|
hekeus@3
|
865 \oddsidemargin 0in
|
hekeus@3
|
866 \evensidemargin 0in
|
hekeus@3
|
867 % set the text width
|
hekeus@3
|
868 \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
869 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
|
hekeus@3
|
870 \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
|
hekeus@3
|
871 \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
|
hekeus@3
|
872 % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
|
hekeus@3
|
873 % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
|
hekeus@3
|
874 \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
875 \divide\textheight by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
876 \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
877 \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
878 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
879
|
hekeus@3
|
880
|
hekeus@3
|
881
|
hekeus@3
|
882 % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
|
hekeus@3
|
883 % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
|
hekeus@3
|
884 \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
885 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
886 \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
887 \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
888 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
889 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
890
|
hekeus@3
|
891 \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
892 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
893 % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
|
hekeus@3
|
894 \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
895 \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
896 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
897 \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
898 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
|
hekeus@3
|
899 \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
900 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
901 \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
902 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
903 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
904 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
905 \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
906 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
907 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
908 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
|
hekeus@3
|
909 outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
hekeus@3
|
910 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
911
|
hekeus@3
|
912
|
hekeus@3
|
913
|
hekeus@3
|
914 % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
|
hekeus@3
|
915 % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
|
hekeus@3
|
916 \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
917 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
918 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
919 \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
920 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
921 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
922
|
hekeus@3
|
923 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
924 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
925 % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
|
hekeus@3
|
926 \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
|
hekeus@3
|
927 \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
928 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
929 \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
930 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
|
hekeus@3
|
931 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
|
hekeus@3
|
932 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
|
hekeus@3
|
933 \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
|
hekeus@3
|
934 \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
935 \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
936 % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
|
hekeus@3
|
937 % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
|
hekeus@3
|
938 % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
|
hekeus@3
|
939 % correct for both.
|
hekeus@3
|
940 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
941 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
|
hekeus@3
|
942 bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
|
hekeus@3
|
943 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
944
|
hekeus@3
|
945
|
hekeus@3
|
946
|
hekeus@3
|
947
|
hekeus@3
|
948
|
hekeus@3
|
949
|
hekeus@3
|
950
|
hekeus@3
|
951 % LIST SPACING CONTROLS
|
hekeus@3
|
952
|
hekeus@3
|
953 % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
954 % above and below \trivlist
|
hekeus@3
|
955 % Both \list and IED lists override this.
|
hekeus@3
|
956 % However, \trivlist will use this as will most
|
hekeus@3
|
957 % things built from \trivlist like the \center
|
hekeus@3
|
958 % environment.
|
hekeus@3
|
959 \topsep 0.5\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
960
|
hekeus@3
|
961 % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
|
hekeus@3
|
962 % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
|
hekeus@3
|
963 % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
|
hekeus@3
|
964 % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
|
hekeus@3
|
965 \partopsep \z@
|
hekeus@3
|
966
|
hekeus@3
|
967 % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
|
hekeus@3
|
968 % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
|
hekeus@3
|
969 % so this is also zero.
|
hekeus@3
|
970 % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
|
hekeus@3
|
971 % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
|
hekeus@3
|
972 \parsep \z@
|
hekeus@3
|
973
|
hekeus@3
|
974 % Controls the extra spacing between list items.
|
hekeus@3
|
975 % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
|
hekeus@3
|
976 % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
|
hekeus@3
|
977 % lists (but not IED lists).
|
hekeus@3
|
978 \itemsep \z@
|
hekeus@3
|
979
|
hekeus@3
|
980 % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
|
hekeus@3
|
981 % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
|
hekeus@3
|
982 % it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
|
hekeus@3
|
983 % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
|
hekeus@3
|
984 % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
|
hekeus@3
|
985 \itemindent -1em
|
hekeus@3
|
986
|
hekeus@3
|
987 % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
|
hekeus@3
|
988 % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
|
hekeus@3
|
989 % Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
|
hekeus@3
|
990 % But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
|
hekeus@3
|
991 \leftmargin 2em
|
hekeus@3
|
992
|
hekeus@3
|
993 % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
|
hekeus@3
|
994 % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
|
hekeus@3
|
995 % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
|
hekeus@3
|
996 % all are overridden.
|
hekeus@3
|
997 \leftmargini 2em
|
hekeus@3
|
998 %\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.
|
hekeus@3
|
999 %\leftmargini 0em
|
hekeus@3
|
1000 \leftmarginii 1em
|
hekeus@3
|
1001 \leftmarginiii 1.5em
|
hekeus@3
|
1002 \leftmarginiv 1.5em
|
hekeus@3
|
1003 \leftmarginv 1.0em
|
hekeus@3
|
1004 \leftmarginvi 1.0em
|
hekeus@3
|
1005 \labelsep 0.5em
|
hekeus@3
|
1006 \labelwidth \z@
|
hekeus@3
|
1007
|
hekeus@3
|
1008
|
hekeus@3
|
1009 % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
|
hekeus@3
|
1010 % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
|
hekeus@3
|
1011 % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
|
hekeus@3
|
1012 % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
|
hekeus@3
|
1013 % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
|
hekeus@3
|
1014 % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
|
hekeus@3
|
1015 % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
|
hekeus@3
|
1016 % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1017 % of these values DO affect \list
|
hekeus@3
|
1018 %
|
hekeus@3
|
1019 \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1020 \let\@listI\@listi
|
hekeus@3
|
1021 \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
|
hekeus@3
|
1022 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1023 \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
|
hekeus@3
|
1024 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1025 \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
|
hekeus@3
|
1026 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1027 \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
|
hekeus@3
|
1028 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1029 \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1030 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1031
|
hekeus@3
|
1032
|
hekeus@3
|
1033 % IEEE uses 5) not 5.
|
hekeus@3
|
1034 \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1035
|
hekeus@3
|
1036 % IEEE uses a) not (a)
|
hekeus@3
|
1037 \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1038
|
hekeus@3
|
1039 % IEEE uses iii) not iii.
|
hekeus@3
|
1040 \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1041
|
hekeus@3
|
1042 % IEEE uses A) not A.
|
hekeus@3
|
1043 \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1044
|
hekeus@3
|
1045 % exactly the same as in article.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
1046 \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1047 \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
|
hekeus@3
|
1048 \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
|
hekeus@3
|
1049
|
hekeus@3
|
1050 % itemized list label styles
|
hekeus@3
|
1051 \def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1052 \def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1053 \def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1054 \def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1055
|
hekeus@3
|
1056
|
hekeus@3
|
1057
|
hekeus@3
|
1058 % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
|
hekeus@3
|
1059 % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
|
hekeus@3
|
1060 % ***************************
|
hekeus@3
|
1061 %
|
hekeus@3
|
1062 %
|
hekeus@3
|
1063 % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
|
hekeus@3
|
1064 % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
|
hekeus@3
|
1065 % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
|
hekeus@3
|
1066 % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
|
hekeus@3
|
1067 % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
|
hekeus@3
|
1068 % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
|
hekeus@3
|
1069 % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
|
hekeus@3
|
1070 % which one you like in your document using a command such as:
|
hekeus@3
|
1071 % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
|
hekeus@3
|
1072 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
|
hekeus@3
|
1073 \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1074
|
hekeus@3
|
1075 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
|
hekeus@3
|
1076 \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1077 % However, we'll default to using \parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1078 % which makes more sense to me
|
hekeus@3
|
1079 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1080 \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
|
hekeus@3
|
1081
|
hekeus@3
|
1082
|
hekeus@3
|
1083 % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
|
hekeus@3
|
1084 % are indented to the right.
|
hekeus@3
|
1085 % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
hekeus@3
|
1086 \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1087 \IEEEelabelindent \parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1088
|
hekeus@3
|
1089 % This controls the default amount the description list labels
|
hekeus@3
|
1090 % are indented to the right.
|
hekeus@3
|
1091 % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
|
hekeus@3
|
1092 \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1093 \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1094
|
hekeus@3
|
1095 % This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
|
hekeus@3
|
1096 % The IED environments automatically set its value to
|
hekeus@3
|
1097 % one of the three values above, so global changes do
|
hekeus@3
|
1098 % not have any effect
|
hekeus@3
|
1099 \newdimen\IEEElabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1100 \IEEElabelindent \parindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1101
|
hekeus@3
|
1102 % The actual amount labels will be indented is
|
hekeus@3
|
1103 % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
|
hekeus@3
|
1104 % corresponding to the level of nesting depth
|
hekeus@3
|
1105 % This provides a means by which the user can
|
hekeus@3
|
1106 % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
|
hekeus@3
|
1107 % levels
|
hekeus@3
|
1108 % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
|
hekeus@3
|
1109 % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
|
hekeus@3
|
1110 % circumstances.
|
hekeus@3
|
1111 % The first list level almost always has full indention.
|
hekeus@3
|
1112 % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
|
hekeus@3
|
1113 % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
|
hekeus@3
|
1114 % that they don't use any indentation.
|
hekeus@3
|
1115 \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one
|
hekeus@3
|
1116 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
|
hekeus@3
|
1117 \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
|
hekeus@3
|
1118 \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
|
hekeus@3
|
1119 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
|
hekeus@3
|
1120 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
|
hekeus@3
|
1121
|
hekeus@3
|
1122 % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
|
hekeus@3
|
1123 % set to one of the 6 values above
|
hekeus@3
|
1124 % global changes here have no effect
|
hekeus@3
|
1125 \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
|
hekeus@3
|
1126
|
hekeus@3
|
1127 % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
hekeus@3
|
1128 % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
|
hekeus@3
|
1129 % the labels.
|
hekeus@3
|
1130 \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1131 \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
|
hekeus@3
|
1132
|
hekeus@3
|
1133 % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
|
hekeus@3
|
1134 % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
|
hekeus@3
|
1135 % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the
|
hekeus@3
|
1136 % spacing in these cases
|
hekeus@3
|
1137 \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1138 \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
|
hekeus@3
|
1139
|
hekeus@3
|
1140 % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
|
hekeus@3
|
1141 % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
1142 % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
|
hekeus@3
|
1143 \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1144 \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1145
|
hekeus@3
|
1146
|
hekeus@3
|
1147 % This command is executed within each IED list environment
|
hekeus@3
|
1148 % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
|
hekeus@3
|
1149 % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
|
hekeus@3
|
1150 % global parameters that affect things other than lists.
|
hekeus@3
|
1151 % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1152 % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
|
hekeus@3
|
1153 % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
|
hekeus@3
|
1154 \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1155
|
hekeus@3
|
1156 % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
|
hekeus@3
|
1157 % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1158 % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
|
hekeus@3
|
1159 % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
|
hekeus@3
|
1160 % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1161 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
hekeus@3
|
1162 \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1163 \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1164 \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1165
|
hekeus@3
|
1166 % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
|
hekeus@3
|
1167 % width of the given text. It is the same as
|
hekeus@3
|
1168 % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
|
hekeus@3
|
1169 % and useful as a shorter alternative.
|
hekeus@3
|
1170 % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
|
hekeus@3
|
1171 % of the longest label in the list
|
hekeus@3
|
1172 \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1173
|
hekeus@3
|
1174 % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
|
hekeus@3
|
1175 % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
|
hekeus@3
|
1176 % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
|
hekeus@3
|
1177 % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
hekeus@3
|
1178 % environments.
|
hekeus@3
|
1179 \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1180
|
hekeus@3
|
1181 % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
|
hekeus@3
|
1182 % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1183 % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
|
hekeus@3
|
1184 % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
|
hekeus@3
|
1185 % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
|
hekeus@3
|
1186 % environments to have an effect.
|
hekeus@3
|
1187 \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
|
hekeus@3
|
1188 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1189
|
hekeus@3
|
1190 % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
|
hekeus@3
|
1191 % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
|
hekeus@3
|
1192 % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
|
hekeus@3
|
1193 % of the IED list environments to have an effect.
|
hekeus@3
|
1194 \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
|
hekeus@3
|
1195 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1196
|
hekeus@3
|
1197
|
hekeus@3
|
1198 % internal variable to indicate type of IED label
|
hekeus@3
|
1199 % justification
|
hekeus@3
|
1200 % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
|
hekeus@3
|
1201 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
|
hekeus@3
|
1202
|
hekeus@3
|
1203
|
hekeus@3
|
1204 % commands to allow the user to control IED
|
hekeus@3
|
1205 % label justifications. Use these commands within
|
hekeus@3
|
1206 % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
|
hekeus@3
|
1207 % Note that changing the normal list justifications
|
hekeus@3
|
1208 % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
|
hekeus@3
|
1209 % I include these commands as they may be helpful to
|
hekeus@3
|
1210 % those who are using these enhanced list controls for
|
hekeus@3
|
1211 % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
|
hekeus@3
|
1212 % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
|
hekeus@3
|
1213 % justification, description defaults to left.
|
hekeus@3
|
1214 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
|
hekeus@3
|
1215 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
|
hekeus@3
|
1216 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
|
hekeus@3
|
1217
|
hekeus@3
|
1218
|
hekeus@3
|
1219
|
hekeus@3
|
1220
|
hekeus@3
|
1221 % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
|
hekeus@3
|
1222 % this allows us to set all the list parameters within
|
hekeus@3
|
1223 % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
|
hekeus@3
|
1224 % from overriding any of our parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1225 % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
|
hekeus@3
|
1226 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
hekeus@3
|
1227 \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1228 \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1229 \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1230 \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1231 \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1232 \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1233 \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1234 \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1235 \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1236 \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1237
|
hekeus@3
|
1238 % Note controlled spacing here
|
hekeus@3
|
1239 \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1240 \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1241 \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1242 \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1243 \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1244 \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1245 \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1246 \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1247 \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1248 \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1249
|
hekeus@3
|
1250
|
hekeus@3
|
1251 % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
|
hekeus@3
|
1252 % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
|
hekeus@3
|
1253 % which must be created by the base classes
|
hekeus@3
|
1254 % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
|
hekeus@3
|
1255 \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
|
hekeus@3
|
1256 \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
|
hekeus@3
|
1257 \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
|
hekeus@3
|
1258 \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
|
hekeus@3
|
1259
|
hekeus@3
|
1260 % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
1261 \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
|
hekeus@3
|
1262 {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
|
hekeus@3
|
1263 \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1264 {\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1265 \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1266 \normalfont\bfseries #1}
|
hekeus@3
|
1267
|
hekeus@3
|
1268
|
hekeus@3
|
1269 % override LaTeX's default IED lists
|
hekeus@3
|
1270 \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
hekeus@3
|
1271 \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
hekeus@3
|
1272 \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
hekeus@3
|
1273 \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
hekeus@3
|
1274 \def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
|
hekeus@3
|
1275 \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
hekeus@3
|
1276
|
hekeus@3
|
1277 % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
|
hekeus@3
|
1278 % override itemize, enumerate, or description
|
hekeus@3
|
1279 \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
|
hekeus@3
|
1280 \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
|
hekeus@3
|
1281 \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
|
hekeus@3
|
1282 \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
|
hekeus@3
|
1283 \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
|
hekeus@3
|
1284 \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
|
hekeus@3
|
1285
|
hekeus@3
|
1286
|
hekeus@3
|
1287 % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
|
hekeus@3
|
1288 % commands so they are protected against redefinition
|
hekeus@3
|
1289 \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1290 \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1291 \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1292 \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1293 \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1294 \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1295
|
hekeus@3
|
1296
|
hekeus@3
|
1297 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1298 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1299 % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
|
hekeus@3
|
1300 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
hekeus@3
|
1301 \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1302 \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1303 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1304 \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
|
hekeus@3
|
1305 \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1306 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
hekeus@3
|
1307 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
hekeus@3
|
1308 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1309 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
hekeus@3
|
1310 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
hekeus@3
|
1311 % set other defaults
|
hekeus@3
|
1312 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1313 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1314 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1315 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1316 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1317 \partopsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1318 \parsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1319 \itemsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1320 \rightmargin 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1321 \listparindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1322 \itemindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1323 % calculate the label width
|
hekeus@3
|
1324 % the user can override this later if
|
hekeus@3
|
1325 % they specified a \labelwidth
|
hekeus@3
|
1326 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1327 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1328 \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1329 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1330 % to our globals
|
hekeus@3
|
1331 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
hekeus@3
|
1332 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1333 #1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1334 % If the user has requested not to use the
|
hekeus@3
|
1335 % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1336 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1337 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1338 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1339 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
hekeus@3
|
1340 % calculate our left margin based
|
hekeus@3
|
1341 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
hekeus@3
|
1342 % \labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1343 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1344 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1345 \fi}\fi\fi}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1346
|
hekeus@3
|
1347
|
hekeus@3
|
1348 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1349 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1350 % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
|
hekeus@3
|
1351 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
hekeus@3
|
1352 \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1353 \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1354 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1355 \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
|
hekeus@3
|
1356 \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1357 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
hekeus@3
|
1358 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
hekeus@3
|
1359 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1360 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
hekeus@3
|
1361 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
|
hekeus@3
|
1362 % set other defaults
|
hekeus@3
|
1363 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1364 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1365 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1366 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1367 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1368 \partopsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1369 \parsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1370 \itemsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1371 \rightmargin 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1372 \listparindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1373 \itemindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1374 % calculate the label width
|
hekeus@3
|
1375 % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
|
hekeus@3
|
1376 % normalfont 1) to 9)
|
hekeus@3
|
1377 % The user can override this later
|
hekeus@3
|
1378 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1379 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1380 \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1381 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1382 % to our globals
|
hekeus@3
|
1383 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
hekeus@3
|
1384 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1385 #1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1386 % If the user has requested not to use the
|
hekeus@3
|
1387 % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1388 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1389 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1390 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1391 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
hekeus@3
|
1392 % calculate our left margin based
|
hekeus@3
|
1393 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
hekeus@3
|
1394 % \labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1395 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1396 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1397 \fi}\fi\fi}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1398
|
hekeus@3
|
1399
|
hekeus@3
|
1400 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1401 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1402 % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
|
hekeus@3
|
1403 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
|
hekeus@3
|
1404 \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1405 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1406 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
|
hekeus@3
|
1407 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
|
hekeus@3
|
1408 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1409 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
|
hekeus@3
|
1410 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
|
hekeus@3
|
1411 % set other defaults
|
hekeus@3
|
1412 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1413 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
1414 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1415 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1416 % assume normal labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1417 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
|
hekeus@3
|
1418 \partopsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1419 \parsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1420 \itemsep 0ex%
|
hekeus@3
|
1421 \rightmargin 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1422 \listparindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1423 \itemindent 0em%
|
hekeus@3
|
1424 % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
|
hekeus@3
|
1425 % to set it.
|
hekeus@3
|
1426 % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
|
hekeus@3
|
1427 % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
|
hekeus@3
|
1428 % display it on the screen during compilation
|
hekeus@3
|
1429 % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
|
hekeus@3
|
1430 % which label is the widest)
|
hekeus@3
|
1431 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1432 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1433 \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1434 % to our globals
|
hekeus@3
|
1435 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
|
hekeus@3
|
1436 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
|
hekeus@3
|
1437 #1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1438 % If the user has requested not to use the
|
hekeus@3
|
1439 % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1440 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1441 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
|
hekeus@3
|
1442 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1443 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
|
hekeus@3
|
1444 % calculate our left margin based
|
hekeus@3
|
1445 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
|
hekeus@3
|
1446 % \labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1447 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1448 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1449 \fi}\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1450
|
hekeus@3
|
1451 % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
|
hekeus@3
|
1452 \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
1453 \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
1454 \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
1455 \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
1456 \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1457
|
hekeus@3
|
1458
|
hekeus@3
|
1459 % VERSE and QUOTE
|
hekeus@3
|
1460 % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
|
hekeus@3
|
1461 \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
|
hekeus@3
|
1462 \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1463 \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1464 {\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1465 \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
|
hekeus@3
|
1466 \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1467 {\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1468 \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1469 {\endlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
1470
|
hekeus@3
|
1471
|
hekeus@3
|
1472 % \titlepage
|
hekeus@3
|
1473 % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
|
hekeus@3
|
1474 % way to create the title page.
|
hekeus@3
|
1475 \newif\if@restonecol
|
hekeus@3
|
1476 \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
1477 \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
|
hekeus@3
|
1478 \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1479
|
hekeus@3
|
1480 % standard values from article.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
1481 \arraycolsep 5pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1482 \arrayrulewidth .4pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1483 \doublerulesep 2pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1484
|
hekeus@3
|
1485 \tabcolsep 6pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1486 \tabbingsep 0.5em
|
hekeus@3
|
1487
|
hekeus@3
|
1488
|
hekeus@3
|
1489 %% FOOTNOTES
|
hekeus@3
|
1490 %
|
hekeus@3
|
1491 %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1492 % V1.6 respond to changes in font size
|
hekeus@3
|
1493 % space added above the footnotes (if present)
|
hekeus@3
|
1494 \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1495
|
hekeus@3
|
1496 % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1497 % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
|
hekeus@3
|
1498 % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
|
hekeus@3
|
1499 % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
|
hekeus@3
|
1500 % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
|
hekeus@3
|
1501 % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1502 % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
|
hekeus@3
|
1503 % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
1504 % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
|
hekeus@3
|
1505 % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
|
hekeus@3
|
1506 % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
|
hekeus@3
|
1507 % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
|
hekeus@3
|
1508 {\footnotesize
|
hekeus@3
|
1509 \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
1510
|
hekeus@3
|
1511
|
hekeus@3
|
1512 \skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
|
hekeus@3
|
1513 \fboxsep = 3pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1514 \fboxrule = .4pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1515 % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
|
hekeus@3
|
1516 % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
|
hekeus@3
|
1517 % box resizing tricks here.
|
hekeus@3
|
1518 \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
|
hekeus@3
|
1519 % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
|
hekeus@3
|
1520 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1521 \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
|
hekeus@3
|
1522 \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
|
hekeus@3
|
1523 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1524
|
hekeus@3
|
1525 % IEEE does not use footnote rules
|
hekeus@3
|
1526 \def\footnoterule{}
|
hekeus@3
|
1527
|
hekeus@3
|
1528 % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
|
hekeus@3
|
1529 % system to implement this.
|
hekeus@3
|
1530 \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
hekeus@3
|
1531 \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1532 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1533 \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
|
hekeus@3
|
1534 \kern-5pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1535 \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
|
hekeus@3
|
1536 \kern4.6pt
|
hekeus@3
|
1537 \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1538 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1539 \relax
|
hekeus@3
|
1540 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1541 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1542
|
hekeus@3
|
1543 % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
|
hekeus@3
|
1544 \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
|
hekeus@3
|
1545
|
hekeus@3
|
1546 % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
|
hekeus@3
|
1547 % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
|
hekeus@3
|
1548 % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
|
hekeus@3
|
1549 \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
|
hekeus@3
|
1550
|
hekeus@3
|
1551 % default allows section depth up to /paragraph
|
hekeus@3
|
1552 \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
|
hekeus@3
|
1553
|
hekeus@3
|
1554 % technotes do not allow /paragraph
|
hekeus@3
|
1555 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
hekeus@3
|
1556 \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
|
hekeus@3
|
1557 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1558 % neither do compsoc conferences
|
hekeus@3
|
1559 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1560
|
hekeus@3
|
1561
|
hekeus@3
|
1562 \newcounter{section}
|
hekeus@3
|
1563 \newcounter{subsection}[section]
|
hekeus@3
|
1564 \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
|
hekeus@3
|
1565 \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
|
hekeus@3
|
1566
|
hekeus@3
|
1567 % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
|
hekeus@3
|
1568 % have their own, different, implementations
|
hekeus@3
|
1569 \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
|
hekeus@3
|
1570
|
hekeus@3
|
1571 % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
|
hekeus@3
|
1572 \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1
|
hekeus@3
|
1573 \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
|
hekeus@3
|
1574 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1575 % compsoc is all arabic
|
hekeus@3
|
1576 \def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1577 \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1578 \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1579 \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1580 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1581 \def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I
|
hekeus@3
|
1582 % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
|
hekeus@3
|
1583 \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A
|
hekeus@3
|
1584 % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
|
hekeus@3
|
1585 \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1
|
hekeus@3
|
1586 \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a
|
hekeus@3
|
1587 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1588
|
hekeus@3
|
1589 % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
|
hekeus@3
|
1590 % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
|
hekeus@3
|
1591 % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
|
hekeus@3
|
1592 % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
|
hekeus@3
|
1593 \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1594 \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1595
|
hekeus@3
|
1596
|
hekeus@3
|
1597 % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
|
hekeus@3
|
1598 % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
|
hekeus@3
|
1599 % in the former to automatically appear in the latter
|
hekeus@3
|
1600 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1601 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
1602 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
|
hekeus@3
|
1603 \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
|
hekeus@3
|
1604 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
|
hekeus@3
|
1605 \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
|
hekeus@3
|
1606 \else% compsoc not conferencs
|
hekeus@3
|
1607 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
|
hekeus@3
|
1608 \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1609 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1610 \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1611 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1612 \else% not compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1613 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.
|
hekeus@3
|
1614 \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.
|
hekeus@3
|
1615 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)
|
hekeus@3
|
1616 \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)
|
hekeus@3
|
1617 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1618
|
hekeus@3
|
1619 % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
|
hekeus@3
|
1620 \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
|
hekeus@3
|
1621 % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
1622 \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
|
hekeus@3
|
1623 % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
|
hekeus@3
|
1624 % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
|
hekeus@3
|
1625 \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
|
hekeus@3
|
1626
|
hekeus@3
|
1627
|
hekeus@3
|
1628
|
hekeus@3
|
1629 % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
|
hekeus@3
|
1630 \def\contentsname{Contents}
|
hekeus@3
|
1631 \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
|
hekeus@3
|
1632 \def\listtablename{List of Tables}
|
hekeus@3
|
1633 \def\refname{References}
|
hekeus@3
|
1634 \def\indexname{Index}
|
hekeus@3
|
1635 \def\figurename{Fig.}
|
hekeus@3
|
1636 \def\tablename{TABLE}
|
hekeus@3
|
1637 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1638 \def\partname{Part}
|
hekeus@3
|
1639 \def\appendixname{Appendix}
|
hekeus@3
|
1640 \def\abstractname{Abstract}
|
hekeus@3
|
1641 % IEEE specific names
|
hekeus@3
|
1642 \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
|
hekeus@3
|
1643 \def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
|
hekeus@3
|
1644
|
hekeus@3
|
1645
|
hekeus@3
|
1646 % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
hekeus@3
|
1647 %
|
hekeus@3
|
1648 \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
|
hekeus@3
|
1649 \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
|
hekeus@3
|
1650 \def\@dotsep{4.5}
|
hekeus@3
|
1651 \setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
|
hekeus@3
|
1652
|
hekeus@3
|
1653 % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
|
hekeus@3
|
1654 % collide with the section titles.
|
hekeus@3
|
1655 % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
|
hekeus@3
|
1656 % MDS 1/2001
|
hekeus@3
|
1657 \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1658 \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1659 \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
|
hekeus@3
|
1660 \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
1661 \endgroup}
|
hekeus@3
|
1662 % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
|
hekeus@3
|
1663 \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1664 \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1665 % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
|
hekeus@3
|
1666 % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
|
hekeus@3
|
1667 % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
|
hekeus@3
|
1668 \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1669 \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1670 \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1671 \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1672 \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1673 \let\l@table\l@figure
|
hekeus@3
|
1674
|
hekeus@3
|
1675
|
hekeus@3
|
1676 %% Definitions for floats
|
hekeus@3
|
1677 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
1678 %% Normal Floats
|
hekeus@3
|
1679 \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1680 \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1681 \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1682 \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1683 \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1684 \def\topfraction{0.9}
|
hekeus@3
|
1685 \def\bottomfraction{0.4}
|
hekeus@3
|
1686 \def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
|
hekeus@3
|
1687 % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
|
hekeus@3
|
1688 \def\textfraction{0.1}
|
hekeus@3
|
1689
|
hekeus@3
|
1690 %% Double Column Floats
|
hekeus@3
|
1691 \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1692
|
hekeus@3
|
1693 \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1694 % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
|
hekeus@3
|
1695 % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
|
hekeus@3
|
1696 % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
|
hekeus@3
|
1697 % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
|
hekeus@3
|
1698 % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
|
hekeus@3
|
1699 % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
|
hekeus@3
|
1700 % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
|
hekeus@3
|
1701 % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
|
hekeus@3
|
1702 % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
|
hekeus@3
|
1703
|
hekeus@3
|
1704 \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1705 \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1706 \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
|
hekeus@3
|
1707 \def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
|
hekeus@3
|
1708 \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
|
hekeus@3
|
1709 \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
|
hekeus@3
|
1710
|
hekeus@3
|
1711 \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1712 \setcounter{topnumber}{2}
|
hekeus@3
|
1713 \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
|
hekeus@3
|
1714 \setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
|
hekeus@3
|
1715
|
hekeus@3
|
1716
|
hekeus@3
|
1717
|
hekeus@3
|
1718 % article class provides these, we should too.
|
hekeus@3
|
1719 \newlength\abovecaptionskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1720 \newlength\belowcaptionskip
|
hekeus@3
|
1721 % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
|
hekeus@3
|
1722 % captions
|
hekeus@3
|
1723 \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
1724 \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1725 % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
|
hekeus@3
|
1726 % overridden by a user
|
hekeus@3
|
1727 \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1728 \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1729
|
hekeus@3
|
1730
|
hekeus@3
|
1731 % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
|
hekeus@3
|
1732 % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
|
hekeus@3
|
1733 \def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
|
hekeus@3
|
1734
|
hekeus@3
|
1735 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1736 % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
|
hekeus@3
|
1737 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
1738 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1739 % test if is a for a figure or table
|
hekeus@3
|
1740 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
hekeus@3
|
1741 % if a table, do table caption
|
hekeus@3
|
1742 \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1743 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1744 % if not a table, format it as a figure
|
hekeus@3
|
1745 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1746 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1747 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1748 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
1749 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
hekeus@3
|
1750 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
|
hekeus@3
|
1751 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1752 % if caption is shorter than a line, center
|
hekeus@3
|
1753 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1754 \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1755 \fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1756 \else% nonconference compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1757 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1758 % test if is a for a figure or table
|
hekeus@3
|
1759 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
hekeus@3
|
1760 % if a table, do table caption
|
hekeus@3
|
1761 \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1762 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1763 % if not a table, format it as a figure
|
hekeus@3
|
1764 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1765 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1766 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1767 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
1768 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
hekeus@3
|
1769 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
|
hekeus@3
|
1770 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1771 % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
|
hekeus@3
|
1772 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1773 \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1774 \fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1775 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1776
|
hekeus@3
|
1777 \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
|
hekeus@3
|
1778 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
1779 % test if is a for a figure or table
|
hekeus@3
|
1780 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
|
hekeus@3
|
1781 % if a table, do table caption
|
hekeus@3
|
1782 \footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1783 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1784 % if not a table, format it as a figure
|
hekeus@3
|
1785 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1786 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
|
hekeus@3
|
1787 % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
|
hekeus@3
|
1788 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1789 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
1790 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
|
hekeus@3
|
1791 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
|
hekeus@3
|
1792 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1793 % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
|
hekeus@3
|
1794 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
1795 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1796 \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1797 \fi\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1798 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1799
|
hekeus@3
|
1800
|
hekeus@3
|
1801
|
hekeus@3
|
1802 % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
|
hekeus@3
|
1803 % within \caption
|
hekeus@3
|
1804 \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
|
hekeus@3
|
1805 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1806 \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
|
hekeus@3
|
1807 \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
1808 \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1809 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1810 \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
|
hekeus@3
|
1811 \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1812 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1813
|
hekeus@3
|
1814
|
hekeus@3
|
1815 % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
|
hekeus@3
|
1816 % preview-latex
|
hekeus@3
|
1817 \newcounter{figure}
|
hekeus@3
|
1818 \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
|
hekeus@3
|
1819 \def\fps@figure{tbp}
|
hekeus@3
|
1820 \def\ftype@figure{1}
|
hekeus@3
|
1821 \def\ext@figure{lof}
|
hekeus@3
|
1822 \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
|
hekeus@3
|
1823 \def\figure{\@float{figure}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1824 \def\endfigure{\end@float}
|
hekeus@3
|
1825 \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1826 \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
hekeus@3
|
1827 \newcounter{table}
|
hekeus@3
|
1828 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
1829 \def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1830 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
1831 \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
|
hekeus@3
|
1832 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
1833 \def\fps@table{tbp}
|
hekeus@3
|
1834 \def\ftype@table{2}
|
hekeus@3
|
1835 \def\ext@table{lot}
|
hekeus@3
|
1836 \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
|
hekeus@3
|
1837 % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
|
hekeus@3
|
1838 % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
|
hekeus@3
|
1839 \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1840 \def\endtable{\end@float}
|
hekeus@3
|
1841 % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
|
hekeus@3
|
1842 \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1843 \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
|
hekeus@3
|
1844
|
hekeus@3
|
1845
|
hekeus@3
|
1846
|
hekeus@3
|
1847
|
hekeus@3
|
1848 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
1849 %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
|
hekeus@3
|
1850 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
1851 %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
|
hekeus@3
|
1852 %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
|
hekeus@3
|
1853 %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
|
hekeus@3
|
1854 %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
|
hekeus@3
|
1855 %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
|
hekeus@3
|
1856
|
hekeus@3
|
1857
|
hekeus@3
|
1858 % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
|
hekeus@3
|
1859 \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1860
|
hekeus@3
|
1861 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
|
hekeus@3
|
1862 \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1863
|
hekeus@3
|
1864 \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
|
hekeus@3
|
1865 % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
1866 % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
|
hekeus@3
|
1867 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
|
hekeus@3
|
1868
|
hekeus@3
|
1869 \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
|
hekeus@3
|
1870 \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
|
hekeus@3
|
1871
|
hekeus@3
|
1872
|
hekeus@3
|
1873 % The default math style used by the columns
|
hekeus@3
|
1874 \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
|
hekeus@3
|
1875 % The default text style used by the columns
|
hekeus@3
|
1876 % default to using the current font
|
hekeus@3
|
1877 \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1878
|
hekeus@3
|
1879 % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
1880 \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1881 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
1882
|
hekeus@3
|
1883 % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
|
hekeus@3
|
1884 % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
|
hekeus@3
|
1885 % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
|
hekeus@3
|
1886 % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
|
hekeus@3
|
1887 \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
1888 \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
1889 \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
1890
|
hekeus@3
|
1891
|
hekeus@3
|
1892 \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
|
hekeus@3
|
1893 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
1894 \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1895 \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1896
|
hekeus@3
|
1897 % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
|
hekeus@3
|
1898 \newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
|
hekeus@3
|
1899 \@IEEEissubequationfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
1900
|
hekeus@3
|
1901 % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
|
hekeus@3
|
1902 \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1903
|
hekeus@3
|
1904 % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
|
hekeus@3
|
1905 % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
|
hekeus@3
|
1906 % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
hekeus@3
|
1907 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
|
hekeus@3
|
1908 \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1909 % check if column is defined
|
hekeus@3
|
1910 \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
hekeus@3
|
1911 \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1912 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
|
hekeus@3
|
1913 \else% if not, error and use default type
|
hekeus@3
|
1914 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
1915 Using a default centering column instead}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1916 {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1917 \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
1918 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
|
hekeus@3
|
1919 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
1920 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
1921 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1922
|
hekeus@3
|
1923 % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
1924 \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
1925
|
hekeus@3
|
1926
|
hekeus@3
|
1927 % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
|
hekeus@3
|
1928 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
|
hekeus@3
|
1929 \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1930 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1931 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1932
|
hekeus@3
|
1933
|
hekeus@3
|
1934 % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
|
hekeus@3
|
1935 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
|
hekeus@3
|
1936 \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1937 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
1938
|
hekeus@3
|
1939
|
hekeus@3
|
1940 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
|
hekeus@3
|
1941
|
hekeus@3
|
1942
|
hekeus@3
|
1943 % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
|
hekeus@3
|
1944 % used to build up the \halign preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
1945 \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1946 \@@IEEEappendtoksA}
|
hekeus@3
|
1947
|
hekeus@3
|
1948 % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
|
hekeus@3
|
1949 % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
|
hekeus@3
|
1950 \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1951 \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1952 \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
|
hekeus@3
|
1953
|
hekeus@3
|
1954 % define some common column types for the user
|
hekeus@3
|
1955 % math
|
hekeus@3
|
1956 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1957 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1958 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1959 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1960 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1961 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1962 % text
|
hekeus@3
|
1963 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1964 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1965 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
|
hekeus@3
|
1966
|
hekeus@3
|
1967 % vertical rules
|
hekeus@3
|
1968 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
1969 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
1970 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
1971 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
|
hekeus@3
|
1972 {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
1973
|
hekeus@3
|
1974 % horizontal rules
|
hekeus@3
|
1975 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1976 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1977
|
hekeus@3
|
1978 % plain
|
hekeus@3
|
1979 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
|
hekeus@3
|
1980 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
|
hekeus@3
|
1981
|
hekeus@3
|
1982 % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
|
hekeus@3
|
1983 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
|
hekeus@3
|
1984
|
hekeus@3
|
1985
|
hekeus@3
|
1986 % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
|
hekeus@3
|
1987 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1988 % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
|
hekeus@3
|
1989 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
1990
|
hekeus@3
|
1991 % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
|
hekeus@3
|
1992 % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
hekeus@3
|
1993 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
|
hekeus@3
|
1994 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
|
hekeus@3
|
1995 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
hekeus@3
|
1996
|
hekeus@3
|
1997
|
hekeus@3
|
1998
|
hekeus@3
|
1999 % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
|
hekeus@3
|
2000 % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
|
hekeus@3
|
2001 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
|
hekeus@3
|
2002 % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
|
hekeus@3
|
2003 \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
2004
|
hekeus@3
|
2005 % creates a blank separator row
|
hekeus@3
|
2006 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
|
hekeus@3
|
2007 % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
hekeus@3
|
2008 % blank arguments inherit the default values
|
hekeus@3
|
2009 % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
hekeus@3
|
2010 \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2011 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2012 \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2013 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2014 % get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
hekeus@3
|
2015 % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
hekeus@3
|
2016 % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
hekeus@3
|
2017 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2018 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2019 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2020 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2021 \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
2022
|
hekeus@3
|
2023 % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
|
hekeus@3
|
2024 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
|
hekeus@3
|
2025 % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
hekeus@3
|
2026 % blank arguments inherit the default values
|
hekeus@3
|
2027 % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
|
hekeus@3
|
2028 \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
hekeus@3
|
2029 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2030 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2031 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2032 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2033 \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2034 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2035 % get the skip value, based on the font commands
|
hekeus@3
|
2036 % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
|
hekeus@3
|
2037 % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
|
hekeus@3
|
2038 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2039 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2040 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2041 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2042 \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
2043
|
hekeus@3
|
2044
|
hekeus@3
|
2045
|
hekeus@3
|
2046 % draws a single rule across all the columns optional
|
hekeus@3
|
2047 % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
hekeus@3
|
2048 % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
|
hekeus@3
|
2049 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
|
hekeus@3
|
2050 \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
hekeus@3
|
2051 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2052 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2053 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2054 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
|
hekeus@3
|
2055 % turn off any struts
|
hekeus@3
|
2056 \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
2057
|
hekeus@3
|
2058
|
hekeus@3
|
2059 % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
|
hekeus@3
|
2060 % another single rule row
|
hekeus@3
|
2061 % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
hekeus@3
|
2062 % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
hekeus@3
|
2063 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
hekeus@3
|
2064 \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
hekeus@3
|
2065 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2066 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2067 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2068 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2069 {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2070 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2071 % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
hekeus@3
|
2072 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2073 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2074 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2075 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2076 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2077 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2078 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2079 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2080 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2081 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2082 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2083 \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2084 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2085 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2086 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2087 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2088 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2089 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2090 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2091 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2092 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2093
|
hekeus@3
|
2094 % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
|
hekeus@3
|
2095 % another single rule row
|
hekeus@3
|
2096 % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
|
hekeus@3
|
2097 % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
|
hekeus@3
|
2098 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
|
hekeus@3
|
2099 \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
|
hekeus@3
|
2100 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2101 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2102 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2103 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2104 {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2105 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2106 % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
|
hekeus@3
|
2107 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2108 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2109 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2110 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2111 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2112 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2113 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2114 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2115 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2116 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2117 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2118 \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2119 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
|
hekeus@3
|
2120 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2121 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2122 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2123 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2124 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2125 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2126 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2127 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2128
|
hekeus@3
|
2129
|
hekeus@3
|
2130
|
hekeus@3
|
2131 % inserts a full row's worth of &'s
|
hekeus@3
|
2132 % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
|
hekeus@3
|
2133 % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
|
hekeus@3
|
2134 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2135 \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
hekeus@3
|
2136 \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2137 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2138 \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
|
hekeus@3
|
2139 \repeat%
|
hekeus@3
|
2140 \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
|
hekeus@3
|
2141 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2142
|
hekeus@3
|
2143
|
hekeus@3
|
2144
|
hekeus@3
|
2145 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
|
hekeus@3
|
2146 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
|
hekeus@3
|
2147
|
hekeus@3
|
2148 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
|
hekeus@3
|
2149 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
2150
|
hekeus@3
|
2151 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
|
hekeus@3
|
2152 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2153
|
hekeus@3
|
2154 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
|
hekeus@3
|
2155 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
|
hekeus@3
|
2156
|
hekeus@3
|
2157 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
|
hekeus@3
|
2158 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used
|
hekeus@3
|
2159
|
hekeus@3
|
2160
|
hekeus@3
|
2161
|
hekeus@3
|
2162 % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2163 \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2164 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2165 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2166 % remove stretchability
|
hekeus@3
|
2167 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2168 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2169 % save values
|
hekeus@3
|
2170 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2171 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2172
|
hekeus@3
|
2173 % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2174 \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2175 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2176 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2177 % remove stretchability
|
hekeus@3
|
2178 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2179 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2180 % restore values
|
hekeus@3
|
2181 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2182 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2183
|
hekeus@3
|
2184
|
hekeus@3
|
2185 % globally restores the strut height and depth to the
|
hekeus@3
|
2186 % master values and sets the master strut flag to true
|
hekeus@3
|
2187 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2188 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2189 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2190 % remove stretchability
|
hekeus@3
|
2191 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2192 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2193 % restore values
|
hekeus@3
|
2194 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2195 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2196 \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
2197
|
hekeus@3
|
2198
|
hekeus@3
|
2199 % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
|
hekeus@3
|
2200 % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
|
hekeus@3
|
2201 % and the use master strut flag, global
|
hekeus@3
|
2202 % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
|
hekeus@3
|
2203 % into the isolation/strut column
|
hekeus@3
|
2204 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2205 \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2206 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2207 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2208 \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
2209 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2210
|
hekeus@3
|
2211
|
hekeus@3
|
2212
|
hekeus@3
|
2213 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
|
hekeus@3
|
2214 % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
|
hekeus@3
|
2215 % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
|
hekeus@3
|
2216 % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2217 % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2218 % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
2219 % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
|
hekeus@3
|
2220 % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
hekeus@3
|
2221 % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
hekeus@3
|
2222 % font is used.
|
hekeus@3
|
2223 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
hekeus@3
|
2224 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2225 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2226 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2227 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2228 \skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2229 \else% arg one present
|
hekeus@3
|
2230 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2231 \skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2232 \fi% if null arg
|
hekeus@3
|
2233 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2234 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2235 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2236 \skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2237 \else% arg two present
|
hekeus@3
|
2238 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2239 \skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2240 \fi% if null arg
|
hekeus@3
|
2241 % remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
hekeus@3
|
2242 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2243 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2244 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
hekeus@3
|
2245 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2246 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2247 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2248 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
hekeus@3
|
2249 \else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
hekeus@3
|
2250 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2251 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2252 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2253 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2254 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2255 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2256
|
hekeus@3
|
2257
|
hekeus@3
|
2258 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
|
hekeus@3
|
2259 % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
|
hekeus@3
|
2260 % and depth to both the master and local struts.
|
hekeus@3
|
2261 % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
|
hekeus@3
|
2262 % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
|
hekeus@3
|
2263 % of the local strut values.
|
hekeus@3
|
2264 % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
|
hekeus@3
|
2265 % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
|
hekeus@3
|
2266 % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
|
hekeus@3
|
2267 % font is used.
|
hekeus@3
|
2268 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
hekeus@3
|
2269 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2270 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2271 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2272 \skip0=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2273 \else% arg one present
|
hekeus@3
|
2274 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2275 \skip0=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2276 \fi% if null arg
|
hekeus@3
|
2277 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2278 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2279 \skip2=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2280 \else% arg two present
|
hekeus@3
|
2281 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2282 \skip2=\skip3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2283 \fi% if null arg
|
hekeus@3
|
2284 % remove stretchability, just to be safe
|
hekeus@3
|
2285 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2286 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2287 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
hekeus@3
|
2288 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2289 % get local strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2290 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2291 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2292 % add it to the user supplied values
|
hekeus@3
|
2293 \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2294 \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2295 % update the local strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2296 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2297 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2298 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
|
hekeus@3
|
2299 \else% outer, have to set master strut too
|
hekeus@3
|
2300 % get master strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2301 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2302 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2303 % add it to the user supplied values
|
hekeus@3
|
2304 \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2305 \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2306 % update the local and master strut sizes
|
hekeus@3
|
2307 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2308 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2309 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2310 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2311 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
|
hekeus@3
|
2312 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2313
|
hekeus@3
|
2314
|
hekeus@3
|
2315 % allow user a way to see the struts
|
hekeus@3
|
2316 \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
|
hekeus@3
|
2317 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
2318
|
hekeus@3
|
2319 % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
|
hekeus@3
|
2320 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
|
hekeus@3
|
2321 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2322 \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
|
hekeus@3
|
2323 % get master strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2324 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2325 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2326 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2327 % get local strut size
|
hekeus@3
|
2328 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2329 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2330 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2331 % remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2332 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2333 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2334 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
|
hekeus@3
|
2335 % allow user to see struts if desired
|
hekeus@3
|
2336 \ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
hekeus@3
|
2337 \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2338 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2339 \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2340
|
hekeus@3
|
2341
|
hekeus@3
|
2342 % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2343 % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
|
hekeus@3
|
2344 % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
|
hekeus@3
|
2345 % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
|
hekeus@3
|
2346 % blank arguments inherit the default values
|
hekeus@3
|
2347 % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
|
hekeus@3
|
2348 \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2349 \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2350 \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2351 \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2352 \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2353 \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2354 \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2355 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2356 \skip0=#1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2357 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2358 \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2359 \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
|
hekeus@3
|
2360 \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2361 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2362 \skip2=#2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2363 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2364 % remove stretchability, probably not needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2365 \dimen0\skip0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2366 \dimen2\skip2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2367 \ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
|
hekeus@3
|
2368 \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2369 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2370 \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2371
|
hekeus@3
|
2372
|
hekeus@3
|
2373 % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
|
hekeus@3
|
2374 % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
|
hekeus@3
|
2375 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
|
hekeus@3
|
2376 \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
2377
|
hekeus@3
|
2378
|
hekeus@3
|
2379
|
hekeus@3
|
2380 \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
hekeus@3
|
2381 \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
hekeus@3
|
2382
|
hekeus@3
|
2383 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
|
hekeus@3
|
2384 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
|
hekeus@3
|
2385
|
hekeus@3
|
2386
|
hekeus@3
|
2387 % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
|
hekeus@3
|
2388 % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
|
hekeus@3
|
2389 % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
|
hekeus@3
|
2390 \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2391 \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2392 % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
|
hekeus@3
|
2393 % the star form was involked
|
hekeus@3
|
2394 \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
2395 \else% not the star form
|
hekeus@3
|
2396 \global\@eqnswtrue
|
hekeus@3
|
2397 \fi% if star form
|
hekeus@3
|
2398 \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
|
hekeus@3
|
2399 \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
|
hekeus@3
|
2400 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
|
hekeus@3
|
2401 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
hekeus@3
|
2402 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
hekeus@3
|
2403 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
hekeus@3
|
2404 % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
hekeus@3
|
2405 \lineskip=0pt\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2406 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2407 \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2408 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2409 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
hekeus@3
|
2410 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
hekeus@3
|
2411 % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
hekeus@3
|
2412 \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
|
hekeus@3
|
2413 \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
|
hekeus@3
|
2414 \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
|
hekeus@3
|
2415 \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
hekeus@3
|
2416 #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
hekeus@3
|
2417 \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
|
hekeus@3
|
2418 \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
|
hekeus@3
|
2419 \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
hekeus@3
|
2420 % put in the column for the equation number
|
hekeus@3
|
2421 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
hekeus@3
|
2422 \toks0={##}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2423 % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
|
hekeus@3
|
2424 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2425 % add the isolation column
|
hekeus@3
|
2426 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2427 % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
|
hekeus@3
|
2428 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2429 % add the equation number col to the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2430 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2431 % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
|
hekeus@3
|
2432 % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
hekeus@3
|
2433 \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2434 % begin the display alignment
|
hekeus@3
|
2435 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
hekeus@3
|
2436 $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
2437 % "exspand" the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2438 \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
hekeus@3
|
2439
|
hekeus@3
|
2440 % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
|
hekeus@3
|
2441 % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
|
hekeus@3
|
2442 % restore counters to correct values and exit
|
hekeus@3
|
2443 \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
|
hekeus@3
|
2444 \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2445 \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
|
hekeus@3
|
2446 $$\@ignoretrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
2447
|
hekeus@3
|
2448 % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
|
hekeus@3
|
2449 \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
|
hekeus@3
|
2450 \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
2451
|
hekeus@3
|
2452 % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
hekeus@3
|
2453 % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
|
hekeus@3
|
2454 % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2455 % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
hekeus@3
|
2456 % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
|
hekeus@3
|
2457 % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
|
hekeus@3
|
2458 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
|
hekeus@3
|
2459 {\ifnum0=`}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2460 \@ifstar{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2461 \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
hekeus@3
|
2462 }{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2463 \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
|
hekeus@3
|
2464 }%
|
hekeus@3
|
2465 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2466
|
hekeus@3
|
2467 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
|
hekeus@3
|
2468
|
hekeus@3
|
2469 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2470 \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2471 \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
|
hekeus@3
|
2472 \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2473
|
hekeus@3
|
2474 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
hekeus@3
|
2475 \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
|
hekeus@3
|
2476 \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2477 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2478 environment}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2479 {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2480 specifications.}\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2481 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2482 \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
|
hekeus@3
|
2483 \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2484 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2485 \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
|
hekeus@3
|
2486 \repeat
|
hekeus@3
|
2487 % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
|
hekeus@3
|
2488 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2489 % execute the &'s
|
hekeus@3
|
2490 \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
|
hekeus@3
|
2491 % handle the strut/isolation column
|
hekeus@3
|
2492 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2493 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2494 &% and enter the equation number column
|
hekeus@3
|
2495 % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
|
hekeus@3
|
2496 % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
|
hekeus@3
|
2497 \if@eqnsw%
|
hekeus@3
|
2498 \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2499 \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
|
hekeus@3
|
2500 \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
|
hekeus@3
|
2501 \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2502 \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2503 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2504 % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
|
hekeus@3
|
2505 \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2506 \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
|
hekeus@3
|
2507 % reset the number of columns the user actually used
|
hekeus@3
|
2508 \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2509 % the real end of the line
|
hekeus@3
|
2510 \cr}
|
hekeus@3
|
2511
|
hekeus@3
|
2512
|
hekeus@3
|
2513
|
hekeus@3
|
2514
|
hekeus@3
|
2515
|
hekeus@3
|
2516 % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
|
hekeus@3
|
2517 % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
|
hekeus@3
|
2518 % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
|
hekeus@3
|
2519 % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
|
hekeus@3
|
2520 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
|
hekeus@3
|
2521 % within an hbox.
|
hekeus@3
|
2522 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
|
hekeus@3
|
2523 % a \hbox{$ $} construct.
|
hekeus@3
|
2524 % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
|
hekeus@3
|
2525 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
|
hekeus@3
|
2526 % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
|
hekeus@3
|
2527 % natural width is the default.
|
hekeus@3
|
2528 % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
2529 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
|
hekeus@3
|
2530 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2531 \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2532 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2533 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2534
|
hekeus@3
|
2535 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2536 \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2537 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2538 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2539
|
hekeus@3
|
2540 \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2541 \@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2542 \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2543
|
hekeus@3
|
2544 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2545 \@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2546 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
|
hekeus@3
|
2547
|
hekeus@3
|
2548 % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
|
hekeus@3
|
2549 % for \vcenter in non-math mode
|
hekeus@3
|
2550 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
|
hekeus@3
|
2551 \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
2552
|
hekeus@3
|
2553 \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2554 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2555 \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2556
|
hekeus@3
|
2557 % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
|
hekeus@3
|
2558 \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
|
hekeus@3
|
2559 \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
|
hekeus@3
|
2560 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
|
hekeus@3
|
2561 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
|
hekeus@3
|
2562 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
|
hekeus@3
|
2563 % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
|
hekeus@3
|
2564 \lineskip=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2565 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2566 \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2567 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2568 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
hekeus@3
|
2569 % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
|
hekeus@3
|
2570 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2571 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2572 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2573 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
|
hekeus@3
|
2574 % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
|
hekeus@3
|
2575 \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
|
hekeus@3
|
2576 #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
|
hekeus@3
|
2577 \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
2578 \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
|
hekeus@3
|
2579 % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
|
hekeus@3
|
2580 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
|
hekeus@3
|
2581 \toks0={##}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2582 % add the isolation column to the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2583 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2584 % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
|
hekeus@3
|
2585 \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2586 % begin the alignment
|
hekeus@3
|
2587 \everycr{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2588 % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
|
hekeus@3
|
2589 % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
|
hekeus@3
|
2590 % but is probably not worth the effort
|
hekeus@3
|
2591 % \noindent is used as a delimiter
|
hekeus@3
|
2592 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2593 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
2594 % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
|
hekeus@3
|
2595 % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
|
hekeus@3
|
2596 \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2597 % use the appropriate vbox type
|
hekeus@3
|
2598 \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2599 \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
|
hekeus@3
|
2600 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
|
hekeus@3
|
2601 \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2602 \bgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
2603 % "exspand" the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2604 \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
|
hekeus@3
|
2605
|
hekeus@3
|
2606 % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
|
hekeus@3
|
2607 % exit from math mode if needed, and exit
|
hekeus@3
|
2608 \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
hekeus@3
|
2609 &% enter isolation/strut column
|
hekeus@3
|
2610 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2611 \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
|
hekeus@3
|
2612 % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2613 % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
|
hekeus@3
|
2614 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
hekeus@3
|
2615 % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
hekeus@3
|
2616 \crcr\egroup\egroup%
|
hekeus@3
|
2617 % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2618 \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2619
|
hekeus@3
|
2620
|
hekeus@3
|
2621
|
hekeus@3
|
2622 % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
|
hekeus@3
|
2623 % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
|
hekeus@3
|
2624 % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2625 % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
|
hekeus@3
|
2626 % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
|
hekeus@3
|
2627 % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
|
hekeus@3
|
2628 % carry strut status into isolation/strut column
|
hekeus@3
|
2629 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
|
hekeus@3
|
2630 &% enter isolation/strut column
|
hekeus@3
|
2631 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
2632 % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
|
hekeus@3
|
2633 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
|
hekeus@3
|
2634 {\ifnum0=`}\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2635 \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2636
|
hekeus@3
|
2637 % test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
hekeus@3
|
2638 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
|
hekeus@3
|
2639
|
hekeus@3
|
2640 % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
|
hekeus@3
|
2641 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2642 \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2643
|
hekeus@3
|
2644
|
hekeus@3
|
2645
|
hekeus@3
|
2646 % starts the halign preamble build
|
hekeus@3
|
2647 \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
|
hekeus@3
|
2648 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
|
hekeus@3
|
2649 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
|
hekeus@3
|
2650 \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
|
hekeus@3
|
2651 % ensure these are valid
|
hekeus@3
|
2652 \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2653 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
|
hekeus@3
|
2654 % currently acquired numerically referenced glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2655 % use a name that is easier to remember
|
hekeus@3
|
2656 \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
hekeus@3
|
2657 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
|
hekeus@3
|
2658 % tracks number of columns in the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2659 \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
|
hekeus@3
|
2660 % record the default end glues
|
hekeus@3
|
2661 \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2662 \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2663 % now parse the user's column specifications
|
hekeus@3
|
2664 \@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
|
hekeus@3
|
2665
|
hekeus@3
|
2666
|
hekeus@3
|
2667 % parses and builds the halign preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2668 \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
|
hekeus@3
|
2669 % use only the very first token to check the end
|
hekeus@3
|
2670 % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
|
hekeus@3
|
2671 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2672 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
2673 \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
2674 % identify current and next token type
|
hekeus@3
|
2675 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
|
hekeus@3
|
2676 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
|
hekeus@3
|
2677 % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
|
hekeus@3
|
2678 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2679 % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
|
hekeus@3
|
2680 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2681 % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2682 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2683 % process the acquired glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2684 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2685 % process the acquired col
|
hekeus@3
|
2686 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2687 % ready prevtype for next col spec.
|
hekeus@3
|
2688 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
|
hekeus@3
|
2689 % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
|
hekeus@3
|
2690 \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2691
|
hekeus@3
|
2692
|
hekeus@3
|
2693 % executed just after preamble build is completed
|
hekeus@3
|
2694 % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2695 \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2696 \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2697 {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2698 \fi%num cols less than 1
|
hekeus@3
|
2699 %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2700 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2701
|
hekeus@3
|
2702
|
hekeus@3
|
2703 % Identify and return the column specifier's type code
|
hekeus@3
|
2704 \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2705 % use only the very first token to determine the type
|
hekeus@3
|
2706 % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
|
hekeus@3
|
2707 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2708 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
2709 % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
|
hekeus@3
|
2710 % n = number
|
hekeus@3
|
2711 % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
|
hekeus@3
|
2712 % c = letter
|
hekeus@3
|
2713 % e = \end
|
hekeus@3
|
2714 % u = undefined
|
hekeus@3
|
2715 % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
|
hekeus@3
|
2716 \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
|
hekeus@3
|
2717 \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2718 \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
|
hekeus@3
|
2719 \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2720 \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2721 \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2722 \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2723 \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2724 \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2725 \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2726 \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2727 \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2728 \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2729 \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2730 \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2731 \if#2u\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
2732 \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2733 {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2734 as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2735
|
hekeus@3
|
2736
|
hekeus@3
|
2737 % identify the current letter referenced column
|
hekeus@3
|
2738 % if invalid, use a default column
|
hekeus@3
|
2739 \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
hekeus@3
|
2740 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
|
hekeus@3
|
2741 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2742 Using a default centering column instead}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2743 {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2744 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2745
|
hekeus@3
|
2746
|
hekeus@3
|
2747 % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
|
hekeus@3
|
2748 \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2749 % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
|
hekeus@3
|
2750 % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
|
hekeus@3
|
2751 % : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
|
hekeus@3
|
2752 % ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
|
hekeus@3
|
2753 % ' = \quad 1em
|
hekeus@3
|
2754 % " = \qquad 2em
|
hekeus@3
|
2755 % . = 0.5\arraycolsep
|
hekeus@3
|
2756 % / = \arraycolsep
|
hekeus@3
|
2757 % ? = 2\arraycolsep
|
hekeus@3
|
2758 % * = 1fil
|
hekeus@3
|
2759 % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
|
hekeus@3
|
2760 % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
|
hekeus@3
|
2761 % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
|
hekeus@3
|
2762 % value for 1em.
|
hekeus@3
|
2763 %
|
hekeus@3
|
2764 % use only the very first token to determine the type
|
hekeus@3
|
2765 % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
|
hekeus@3
|
2766 % \noindent is used as a delimiter here
|
hekeus@3
|
2767 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2768 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
2769 % get the math font 1em value
|
hekeus@3
|
2770 % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
|
hekeus@3
|
2771 % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
|
hekeus@3
|
2772 % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
|
hekeus@3
|
2773 % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
|
hekeus@3
|
2774 % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
|
hekeus@3
|
2775 % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
|
hekeus@3
|
2776 {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2777 % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
|
hekeus@3
|
2778 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2779 % identify the glue value based on the first token
|
hekeus@3
|
2780 % we discard anything after the first
|
hekeus@3
|
2781 \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2782 \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2783 \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2784 \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2785 \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2786 \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2787 \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2788 \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2789 \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2790 \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2791 \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2792 \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2793 \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2794 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2795 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2796 0pt instead}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2797 {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2798 IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2799
|
hekeus@3
|
2800
|
hekeus@3
|
2801
|
hekeus@3
|
2802 % process a numerical digit from the column specification
|
hekeus@3
|
2803 % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
|
hekeus@3
|
2804 % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
|
hekeus@3
|
2805 \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
|
hekeus@3
|
2806 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2807 specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2808 after the first}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2809 {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2810 in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2811 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
|
hekeus@3
|
2812 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2813 \else% if we previously aborted a glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2814 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
|
hekeus@3
|
2815 \else%acquire this number
|
hekeus@3
|
2816 % save the previous type before the numerical digits started
|
hekeus@3
|
2817 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
2818 \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2819 \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
|
hekeus@3
|
2820 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
|
hekeus@3
|
2821 \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
|
hekeus@3
|
2822 \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2823 \else%user glue not defined
|
hekeus@3
|
2824 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2825 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2826 0pt instead}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2827 {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2828 \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2829 \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2830 \fi% glue defined or not
|
hekeus@3
|
2831 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2832 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2833 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
|
hekeus@3
|
2834 \fi%close acquisition, get glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2835 \fi%discard or acquire number
|
hekeus@3
|
2836 \fi%prevtype glue or not
|
hekeus@3
|
2837 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2838
|
hekeus@3
|
2839
|
hekeus@3
|
2840 % process an acquired glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2841 % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2842 \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
|
hekeus@3
|
2843 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2844 % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
|
hekeus@3
|
2845 % as this is not used in the preamble, but before
|
hekeus@3
|
2846 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2847 \else%not the start glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2848 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
|
hekeus@3
|
2849 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2850 specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2851 after the first}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2852 {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2853 in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2854 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2855 \else% not a back to back glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2856 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2857 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2858 \toks0={##}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2859 % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
hekeus@3
|
2860 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2861 % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
hekeus@3
|
2862 % the column definition
|
hekeus@3
|
2863 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2864 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2865 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2866 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2867 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2868 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2869 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2870 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2871 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2872 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2873 \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2874 \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
|
hekeus@3
|
2875 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2876 type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2877 specifier}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2878 {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
|
hekeus@3
|
2879 between column types.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2880 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2881 \fi% previous was a column
|
hekeus@3
|
2882 \fi% back-to-back glues
|
hekeus@3
|
2883 \fi% is start column glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2884 \fi% prev type not a
|
hekeus@3
|
2885 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2886
|
hekeus@3
|
2887
|
hekeus@3
|
2888 % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2889 \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2890 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2891 % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
|
hekeus@3
|
2892 % so we must add this column to the preamble now
|
hekeus@3
|
2893 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
|
hekeus@3
|
2894 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2895 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2896 \toks0={##}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2897 % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
|
hekeus@3
|
2898 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2899 % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
|
hekeus@3
|
2900 % the column definition
|
hekeus@3
|
2901 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2902 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2903 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2904 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2905 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2906 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2907 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2908 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
2909 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2910 \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
|
hekeus@3
|
2911 \fi%next type not numeral
|
hekeus@3
|
2912 \fi%next type not glue
|
hekeus@3
|
2913 }
|
hekeus@3
|
2914
|
hekeus@3
|
2915
|
hekeus@3
|
2916 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
2917 %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
|
hekeus@3
|
2918 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
2919
|
hekeus@3
|
2920
|
hekeus@3
|
2921
|
hekeus@3
|
2922
|
hekeus@3
|
2923 % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
|
hekeus@3
|
2924 % modes IEEEtran supports
|
hekeus@3
|
2925 \if@twoside
|
hekeus@3
|
2926 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
hekeus@3
|
2927 \def\ps@headings{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2928 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
hekeus@3
|
2929 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2930 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
2931 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
hekeus@3
|
2932 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2933 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2934 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
|
hekeus@3
|
2935 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
|
hekeus@3
|
2936 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2937 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2938 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2939 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2940 \else % not a technote
|
hekeus@3
|
2941 \def\ps@headings{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2942 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
2943 \def\@oddhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2944 \def\@evenhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2945 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2946 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
|
hekeus@3
|
2947 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2948 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2949 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
2950 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
|
hekeus@3
|
2951 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2952 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
hekeus@3
|
2953 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2954 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2955 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
|
hekeus@3
|
2956 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
|
hekeus@3
|
2957 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2958 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2959 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2960 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
2961 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2962 \else % single side
|
hekeus@3
|
2963 \def\ps@headings{%
|
hekeus@3
|
2964 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
2965 \def\@oddhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2966 \def\@evenhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2967 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2968 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
hekeus@3
|
2969 \def\@evenhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2970 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2971 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
2972 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
|
hekeus@3
|
2973 \def\@evenhead{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2974 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
|
hekeus@3
|
2975 \def\@oddfoot{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2976 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2977 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
|
hekeus@3
|
2978 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2979 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2980 \def\@oddfoot{}
|
hekeus@3
|
2981 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2982 \def\@evenfoot{}}
|
hekeus@3
|
2983 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2984
|
hekeus@3
|
2985
|
hekeus@3
|
2986 % title page style
|
hekeus@3
|
2987 \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2988 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
2989 \def\@oddhead{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2990 \def\@evenhead{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2991 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
2992 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2993 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2994 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
2995 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
2996 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2997 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
2998 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
hekeus@3
|
2999 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3000 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3001 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3002 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3003 % all non-draft mode footers
|
hekeus@3
|
3004 \if@IEEEusingpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
3005 % for title pages that are using a pubid
|
hekeus@3
|
3006 % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
|
hekeus@3
|
3007 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3008 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3009 \footskip 0pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
3010 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3011 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3012 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3013 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3014 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3015 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3016 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3017 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3018 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3019 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
3020
|
hekeus@3
|
3021
|
hekeus@3
|
3022 % peer review cover page style
|
hekeus@3
|
3023 \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3024 \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3025 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3026 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
3027 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3028 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3029 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3030 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3031 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3032 % non-draft mode footers
|
hekeus@3
|
3033 \if@IEEEusingpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
3034 \footskip 0pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
3035 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3036 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3037 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3038 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3039 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3040 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3041 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3042 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3043 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
3044
|
hekeus@3
|
3045
|
hekeus@3
|
3046 % start with empty headings
|
hekeus@3
|
3047 \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
|
hekeus@3
|
3048
|
hekeus@3
|
3049
|
hekeus@3
|
3050 %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
|
hekeus@3
|
3051 %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}.
|
hekeus@3
|
3052 %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
|
hekeus@3
|
3053 %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
|
hekeus@3
|
3054 %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
|
hekeus@3
|
3055 %% arguments to \markboth.
|
hekeus@3
|
3056 \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3057 \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3058 \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3059
|
hekeus@3
|
3060 \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
|
hekeus@3
|
3061 January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
hekeus@3
|
3062 July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3063 \space\number\day, \number\year}
|
hekeus@3
|
3064
|
hekeus@3
|
3065
|
hekeus@3
|
3066
|
hekeus@3
|
3067
|
hekeus@3
|
3068 %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
|
hekeus@3
|
3069 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
3070 %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
|
hekeus@3
|
3071 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3072 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3073 % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
|
hekeus@3
|
3074 \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3075 \let\@citea\@empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3076 \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
|
hekeus@3
|
3077 {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3078 \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3079 \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3080 \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3081 \G@refundefinedtrue
|
hekeus@3
|
3082 \@latex@warning
|
hekeus@3
|
3083 {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3084 {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3085
|
hekeus@3
|
3086 % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
|
hekeus@3
|
3087 % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
|
hekeus@3
|
3088 % following format controls are already defined and will not
|
hekeus@3
|
3089 % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
|
hekeus@3
|
3090 % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
|
hekeus@3
|
3091 % all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
|
hekeus@3
|
3092 % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
|
hekeus@3
|
3093 % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
|
hekeus@3
|
3094 % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
|
hekeus@3
|
3095 % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
|
hekeus@3
|
3096 % that \cite.
|
hekeus@3
|
3097 % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
|
hekeus@3
|
3098 % to produce the IEEE style.
|
hekeus@3
|
3099 \def\citepunct{], [}
|
hekeus@3
|
3100 \def\citedash{]--[}
|
hekeus@3
|
3101
|
hekeus@3
|
3102 % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
|
hekeus@3
|
3103 \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
|
hekeus@3
|
3104
|
hekeus@3
|
3105 % V1.6 class files should always provide these
|
hekeus@3
|
3106 \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
|
hekeus@3
|
3107 \let\@openbib@code\@empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3108
|
hekeus@3
|
3109
|
hekeus@3
|
3110 % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
|
hekeus@3
|
3111 % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
|
hekeus@3
|
3112 % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
|
hekeus@3
|
3113 % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
|
hekeus@3
|
3114 % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
|
hekeus@3
|
3115 \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3116 \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
|
hekeus@3
|
3117 \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3118 \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3119 \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3120 \@esphack}
|
hekeus@3
|
3121
|
hekeus@3
|
3122 % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
|
hekeus@3
|
3123 % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
|
hekeus@3
|
3124 % the columns on the last page
|
hekeus@3
|
3125 \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that
|
hekeus@3
|
3126 % the command is not executed
|
hekeus@3
|
3127 \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
|
hekeus@3
|
3128
|
hekeus@3
|
3129 % allow the user to alter the triggered command
|
hekeus@3
|
3130 \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3131
|
hekeus@3
|
3132 % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
|
hekeus@3
|
3133 % command is executed
|
hekeus@3
|
3134 \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3135 \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3136
|
hekeus@3
|
3137 % trigger command at the given reference
|
hekeus@3
|
3138 \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3139 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3140 \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
3141
|
hekeus@3
|
3142
|
hekeus@3
|
3143 \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
|
hekeus@3
|
3144
|
hekeus@3
|
3145 % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
|
hekeus@3
|
3146 \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3147
|
hekeus@3
|
3148 % controls bib item spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
3149 \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
3150
|
hekeus@3
|
3151 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3152
|
hekeus@3
|
3153
|
hekeus@3
|
3154 \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3155 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3156 % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
|
hekeus@3
|
3157 \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3158 \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3159 {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3160 \leftmargin\labelwidth
|
hekeus@3
|
3161 \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3162 \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3163 \usecounter{enumiv}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3164 \let\p@enumiv\@empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3165 \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3166 \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
|
hekeus@3
|
3167 \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3168 \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3169 % originally:
|
hekeus@3
|
3170 % \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
|
hekeus@3
|
3171 % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
|
hekeus@3
|
3172 % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
|
hekeus@3
|
3173 % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
|
hekeus@3
|
3174 % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
|
hekeus@3
|
3175 % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish.
|
hekeus@3
|
3176 % MDS 11/2000
|
hekeus@3
|
3177 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
|
hekeus@3
|
3178 \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3179 \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3180 \let\endthebibliography=\endlist
|
hekeus@3
|
3181
|
hekeus@3
|
3182
|
hekeus@3
|
3183
|
hekeus@3
|
3184
|
hekeus@3
|
3185 % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
|
hekeus@3
|
3186 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3187 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3188 % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
|
hekeus@3
|
3189 % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
|
hekeus@3
|
3190 \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3191
|
hekeus@3
|
3192
|
hekeus@3
|
3193 % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
|
hekeus@3
|
3194 % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
|
hekeus@3
|
3195 % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
|
hekeus@3
|
3196 % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
|
hekeus@3
|
3197 % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
|
hekeus@3
|
3198 % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
|
hekeus@3
|
3199 % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
|
hekeus@3
|
3200 % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
|
hekeus@3
|
3201 % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
|
hekeus@3
|
3202 % with the text above.
|
hekeus@3
|
3203 % V1.7 make this a robust command
|
hekeus@3
|
3204 \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
|
hekeus@3
|
3205 \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
|
hekeus@3
|
3206 \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3207
|
hekeus@3
|
3208
|
hekeus@3
|
3209 % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
|
hekeus@3
|
3210 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3211 % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
hekeus@3
|
3212 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3213 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3214 % The default if the user does not use an author block
|
hekeus@3
|
3215 \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
|
hekeus@3
|
3216
|
hekeus@3
|
3217 % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
|
hekeus@3
|
3218 % can be negative
|
hekeus@3
|
3219 \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
|
hekeus@3
|
3220 % compsoc conferences need more space here
|
hekeus@3
|
3221 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3222
|
hekeus@3
|
3223 % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
hekeus@3
|
3224 % This can be negative.
|
hekeus@3
|
3225 % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
|
hekeus@3
|
3226 % controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
|
hekeus@3
|
3227 % Personally, I like 0.75ex.
|
hekeus@3
|
3228 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3229 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3230 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3231 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3232 % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
|
hekeus@3
|
3233 % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
|
hekeus@3
|
3234 % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
|
hekeus@3
|
3235 % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
|
hekeus@3
|
3236 % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
|
hekeus@3
|
3237 % these above 2.6ex
|
hekeus@3
|
3238 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3239 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3240
|
hekeus@3
|
3241 % This tracks the required strut size.
|
hekeus@3
|
3242 % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
|
hekeus@3
|
3243 \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
|
hekeus@3
|
3244
|
hekeus@3
|
3245 % variables to retain font size and style across groups
|
hekeus@3
|
3246 % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
|
hekeus@3
|
3247 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
|
hekeus@3
|
3248 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
|
hekeus@3
|
3249 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
|
hekeus@3
|
3250 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
|
hekeus@3
|
3251 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
|
hekeus@3
|
3252 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
|
hekeus@3
|
3253
|
hekeus@3
|
3254 % saves the current font attributes
|
hekeus@3
|
3255 \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
|
hekeus@3
|
3256 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3257 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
|
hekeus@3
|
3258 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
|
hekeus@3
|
3259 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
|
hekeus@3
|
3260 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
|
hekeus@3
|
3261
|
hekeus@3
|
3262 % restores the saved font attributes
|
hekeus@3
|
3263 \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3264 \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3265 \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3266 \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3267 \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3268 \selectfont}
|
hekeus@3
|
3269
|
hekeus@3
|
3270
|
hekeus@3
|
3271 % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
|
hekeus@3
|
3272 \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
3273
|
hekeus@3
|
3274
|
hekeus@3
|
3275 % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
|
hekeus@3
|
3276 % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
|
hekeus@3
|
3277 % within the halign environment.
|
hekeus@3
|
3278 % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
|
hekeus@3
|
3279 % baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
|
hekeus@3
|
3280 % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
3281 \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
|
hekeus@3
|
3282 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
hekeus@3
|
3283 \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3284
|
hekeus@3
|
3285
|
hekeus@3
|
3286 % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
|
hekeus@3
|
3287 % Makes formatting easy for conferences
|
hekeus@3
|
3288 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3289 % use real definitions in conference mode
|
hekeus@3
|
3290 % name block
|
hekeus@3
|
3291 \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
|
hekeus@3
|
3292 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
|
hekeus@3
|
3293 % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
hekeus@3
|
3294 % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
hekeus@3
|
3295 % do a spacer row if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
3296 \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3297 \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
hekeus@3
|
3298 %restore the correct strut value
|
hekeus@3
|
3299 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3300 % input the author names
|
hekeus@3
|
3301 #1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3302 % end the row if the user did not already
|
hekeus@3
|
3303 \crcr}
|
hekeus@3
|
3304 % spacer row for names
|
hekeus@3
|
3305 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3306 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3307 % affiliation block
|
hekeus@3
|
3308 \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
|
hekeus@3
|
3309 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
|
hekeus@3
|
3310 % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
|
hekeus@3
|
3311 % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
|
hekeus@3
|
3312 % do a spacer row if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
3313 \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3314 \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
|
hekeus@3
|
3315 %restore the correct strut value
|
hekeus@3
|
3316 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3317 % input the author affiliations
|
hekeus@3
|
3318 #1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3319 % end the row if the user did not already
|
hekeus@3
|
3320 \crcr}
|
hekeus@3
|
3321 % spacer row for affiliations
|
hekeus@3
|
3322 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3323
|
hekeus@3
|
3324
|
hekeus@3
|
3325 % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
|
hekeus@3
|
3326 % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
|
hekeus@3
|
3327 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
3328 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3329 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3330 % not conference or peerreviewca mode
|
hekeus@3
|
3331 \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3332 \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3333 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3334 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3335
|
hekeus@3
|
3336
|
hekeus@3
|
3337
|
hekeus@3
|
3338 % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
|
hekeus@3
|
3339 \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
|
hekeus@3
|
3340 \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
3341 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3342 \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3343 \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
|
hekeus@3
|
3344 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
|
hekeus@3
|
3345 \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
|
hekeus@3
|
3346 \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
3347 \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
|
hekeus@3
|
3348 \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
|
hekeus@3
|
3349 \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
|
hekeus@3
|
3350 \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
|
hekeus@3
|
3351 \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3352 \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
|
hekeus@3
|
3353
|
hekeus@3
|
3354 % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
|
hekeus@3
|
3355 \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
|
hekeus@3
|
3356
|
hekeus@3
|
3357 % handle bogus star form
|
hekeus@3
|
3358 \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3359
|
hekeus@3
|
3360 % test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
|
hekeus@3
|
3361 \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
|
hekeus@3
|
3362
|
hekeus@3
|
3363 % end the line and do the optional spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
3364 \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3365
|
hekeus@3
|
3366
|
hekeus@3
|
3367
|
hekeus@3
|
3368 % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
|
hekeus@3
|
3369 \newif\if@IEEEWARNand
|
hekeus@3
|
3370 \@IEEEWARNandtrue
|
hekeus@3
|
3371
|
hekeus@3
|
3372 % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
|
hekeus@3
|
3373 % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
|
hekeus@3
|
3374 % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
|
hekeus@3
|
3375 \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
|
hekeus@3
|
3376
|
hekeus@3
|
3377 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
|
hekeus@3
|
3378 when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
3379
|
hekeus@3
|
3380 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
hekeus@3
|
3381 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3382 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3383 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
hekeus@3
|
3384 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3385 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3386
|
hekeus@3
|
3387
|
hekeus@3
|
3388 % page clearing command
|
hekeus@3
|
3389 % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
|
hekeus@3
|
3390 % for the inserted blank pages
|
hekeus@3
|
3391 \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3392 \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
3393
|
hekeus@3
|
3394
|
hekeus@3
|
3395 % user command to invoke the title page
|
hekeus@3
|
3396 \def\maketitle{\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
3397 \begingroup%
|
hekeus@3
|
3398 \normalfont%
|
hekeus@3
|
3399 \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3400 \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
|
hekeus@3
|
3401 \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
|
hekeus@3
|
3402 \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines
|
hekeus@3
|
3403 \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
|
hekeus@3
|
3404 % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3405 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3406 \normalsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
3407 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3408 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
hekeus@3
|
3409 \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
|
hekeus@3
|
3410 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3411 \if@twocolumn%
|
hekeus@3
|
3412 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
|
hekeus@3
|
3413 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
hekeus@3
|
3414 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3415 \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
|
hekeus@3
|
3416 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3417 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3418 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
|
hekeus@3
|
3419 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3420 \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
|
hekeus@3
|
3421 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3422 % pullup page for pubid if used.
|
hekeus@3
|
3423 \if@IEEEusingpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
3424 \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3425 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3426 \endgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
3427 \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3428 \gdef\@thanks{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3429 % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
|
hekeus@3
|
3430 % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3431 \let\thanks\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3432
|
hekeus@3
|
3433
|
hekeus@3
|
3434
|
hekeus@3
|
3435 % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
|
hekeus@3
|
3436 \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3437
|
hekeus@3
|
3438 % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
|
hekeus@3
|
3439 % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
|
hekeus@3
|
3440 % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
|
hekeus@3
|
3441 \def\@maketitle{\newpage
|
hekeus@3
|
3442 \begin{center}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3443 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
|
hekeus@3
|
3444 {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
|
hekeus@3
|
3445 \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3446 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
|
hekeus@3
|
3447 \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3448 \else% not a technote
|
hekeus@3
|
3449 \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3450 \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
3451 % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
|
hekeus@3
|
3452 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
hekeus@3
|
3453 {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
hekeus@3
|
3454 \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3455 \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
|
hekeus@3
|
3456 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
|
hekeus@3
|
3457 % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
|
hekeus@3
|
3458 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
|
hekeus@3
|
3459 \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
|
hekeus@3
|
3460 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3461 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
|
hekeus@3
|
3462 \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3463 \else% journal or peerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3464 {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
|
hekeus@3
|
3465 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3466 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
|
hekeus@3
|
3467 \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3468 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3469 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3470 \fi\end{center}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3471
|
hekeus@3
|
3472
|
hekeus@3
|
3473
|
hekeus@3
|
3474 % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
|
hekeus@3
|
3475 \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3476 \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3477 \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3478
|
hekeus@3
|
3479 % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
|
hekeus@3
|
3480 % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
|
hekeus@3
|
3481 \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
3482
|
hekeus@3
|
3483
|
hekeus@3
|
3484 \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
|
hekeus@3
|
3485 \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
3486 \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
|
hekeus@3
|
3487 \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3488 \let\@thanks\@empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3489
|
hekeus@3
|
3490 % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
|
hekeus@3
|
3491 \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3492
|
hekeus@3
|
3493
|
hekeus@3
|
3494 % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
|
hekeus@3
|
3495 % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
|
hekeus@3
|
3496 \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3497 \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3498 \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3499
|
hekeus@3
|
3500
|
hekeus@3
|
3501 % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
|
hekeus@3
|
3502 \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
3503
|
hekeus@3
|
3504 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3505 % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
3506 % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
|
hekeus@3
|
3507 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
|
hekeus@3
|
3508 \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
3509 \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
|
hekeus@3
|
3510 {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3511 \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3512 \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
|
hekeus@3
|
3513 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3514 % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
3515 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3516 % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
|
hekeus@3
|
3517 \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3518 {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3519 % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
|
hekeus@3
|
3520 \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
|
hekeus@3
|
3521 \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
|
hekeus@3
|
3522 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3523
|
hekeus@3
|
3524
|
hekeus@3
|
3525 % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
|
hekeus@3
|
3526 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3527 \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3528 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
3529 \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
|
hekeus@3
|
3530 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3531 \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3532 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3533 \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3534 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3535 % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
|
hekeus@3
|
3536 \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3537 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3538
|
hekeus@3
|
3539 % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
|
hekeus@3
|
3540 \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3541 \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
|
hekeus@3
|
3542 \end{center}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3543
|
hekeus@3
|
3544
|
hekeus@3
|
3545
|
hekeus@3
|
3546 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
3547 % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
|
hekeus@3
|
3548 % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
|
hekeus@3
|
3549 % of two column text (technotes).
|
hekeus@3
|
3550 \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
3551 % adjust spacing to next text
|
hekeus@3
|
3552 % v1.6b handle peer review papers
|
hekeus@3
|
3553 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3554 % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
|
hekeus@3
|
3555 % regardless of the other paper modes
|
hekeus@3
|
3556 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3557 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3558 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
|
hekeus@3
|
3559 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3560 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
3561 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
|
hekeus@3
|
3562 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3563 \else% journal uses more space
|
hekeus@3
|
3564 \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3565 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3566 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3567 \fi}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3568
|
hekeus@3
|
3569
|
hekeus@3
|
3570 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
3571 % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors
|
hekeus@3
|
3572 % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two
|
hekeus@3
|
3573 % column text (most common)
|
hekeus@3
|
3574 % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
|
hekeus@3
|
3575 % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3576 % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
|
hekeus@3
|
3577 % text on the titlepage
|
hekeus@3
|
3578 % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
|
hekeus@3
|
3579 \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3580 % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
|
hekeus@3
|
3581 \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
|
hekeus@3
|
3582 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
|
hekeus@3
|
3583 \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
|
hekeus@3
|
3584 \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
|
hekeus@3
|
3585 \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
|
hekeus@3
|
3586 % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
3587 % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
|
hekeus@3
|
3588 % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
|
hekeus@3
|
3589 % lengthened
|
hekeus@3
|
3590 % default to journal values
|
hekeus@3
|
3591 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3592 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3593 % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
3594 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
|
hekeus@3
|
3595 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3596 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3597 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3598 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
|
hekeus@3
|
3599 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3600 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3601 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3602 % get the height that the title will take up
|
hekeus@3
|
3603 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3604 \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3605 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3606 \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3607 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3608 \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
|
hekeus@3
|
3609 % add the height of the page textheight
|
hekeus@3
|
3610 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3611 % correct for title pages using pubid
|
hekeus@3
|
3612 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3613 % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
|
hekeus@3
|
3614 % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
|
hekeus@3
|
3615 \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3616 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3617 % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
3618 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
|
hekeus@3
|
3619 % \topskip takes away some too
|
hekeus@3
|
3620 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3621 % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
|
hekeus@3
|
3622 % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
|
hekeus@3
|
3623 % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
|
hekeus@3
|
3624 % and discard any excess fractional remainder
|
hekeus@3
|
3625 % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
|
hekeus@3
|
3626 % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
|
hekeus@3
|
3627 % rest of the lines.
|
hekeus@3
|
3628 \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3629 \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3630 \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3631 % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
|
hekeus@3
|
3632 % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
|
hekeus@3
|
3633 % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
|
hekeus@3
|
3634 % number of normal size lines
|
hekeus@3
|
3635 % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
|
hekeus@3
|
3636 % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
|
hekeus@3
|
3637 \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3638 \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3639 \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3640 % this is the calculated height of the spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
3641 % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
|
hekeus@3
|
3642 % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
|
hekeus@3
|
3643 \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3644 \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
|
hekeus@3
|
3645 % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
|
hekeus@3
|
3646 \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3647 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3648 % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
|
hekeus@3
|
3649 \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
3650 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3651 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3652 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
3653 % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
|
hekeus@3
|
3654 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
|
hekeus@3
|
3655 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3656 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3657 % set the calculated rigid spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
3658 \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3659
|
hekeus@3
|
3660
|
hekeus@3
|
3661
|
hekeus@3
|
3662 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
3663 % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
|
hekeus@3
|
3664 % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
|
hekeus@3
|
3665 % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
|
hekeus@3
|
3666 \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3667 \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3668
|
hekeus@3
|
3669 % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
|
hekeus@3
|
3670 % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
|
hekeus@3
|
3671 % in the dynamic sizer.
|
hekeus@3
|
3672 \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3673 \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3674 % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
|
hekeus@3
|
3675 % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
|
hekeus@3
|
3676 % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
|
hekeus@3
|
3677 \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3678 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
|
hekeus@3
|
3679 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3680 \else% or if not compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3681 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
3682
|
hekeus@3
|
3683
|
hekeus@3
|
3684 % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
|
hekeus@3
|
3685 % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
|
hekeus@3
|
3686 \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
|
hekeus@3
|
3687 \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
3688 \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3689
|
hekeus@3
|
3690
|
hekeus@3
|
3691 % abstract and keywords are in \small, except
|
hekeus@3
|
3692 % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
|
hekeus@3
|
3693 % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
|
hekeus@3
|
3694 % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
|
hekeus@3
|
3695 \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
|
hekeus@3
|
3696 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
|
hekeus@3
|
3697 \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
|
hekeus@3
|
3698 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3699
|
hekeus@3
|
3700 % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
|
hekeus@3
|
3701 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3702 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3703
|
hekeus@3
|
3704
|
hekeus@3
|
3705
|
hekeus@3
|
3706
|
hekeus@3
|
3707 % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
|
hekeus@3
|
3708 % so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
|
hekeus@3
|
3709 \def\abstract{\normalfont
|
hekeus@3
|
3710 \if@twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
3711 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3712 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3713 \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
hekeus@3
|
3714 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3715 % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
|
hekeus@3
|
3716 % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
|
hekeus@3
|
3717 \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3718 \normalfont\normalsize}
|
hekeus@3
|
3719
|
hekeus@3
|
3720 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
|
hekeus@3
|
3721 \if@twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
3722 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3723 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3724 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
|
hekeus@3
|
3725 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3726 \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3727 \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3728 \normalfont\normalsize}
|
hekeus@3
|
3729
|
hekeus@3
|
3730 % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
|
hekeus@3
|
3731 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3732 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
3733 \def\abstract{\normalfont
|
hekeus@3
|
3734 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3735 \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
3736 \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3737 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3738 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
3739 \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
3740 \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3741 \else% compsoc not conference
|
hekeus@3
|
3742 \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
hekeus@3
|
3743 \if@twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
3744 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3745 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3746 \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
3747 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3748 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
|
hekeus@3
|
3749 \if@twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
3750 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
3751 \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3752 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3753 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
|
hekeus@3
|
3754 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
|
hekeus@3
|
3755 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3756 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3757
|
hekeus@3
|
3758
|
hekeus@3
|
3759
|
hekeus@3
|
3760 % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
|
hekeus@3
|
3761 % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
|
hekeus@3
|
3762 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3763 % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
|
hekeus@3
|
3764 % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
|
hekeus@3
|
3765 % affect the formatting of the text
|
hekeus@3
|
3766 \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
|
hekeus@3
|
3767 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3768 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
3769 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
|
hekeus@3
|
3770 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
|
hekeus@3
|
3771 \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
|
hekeus@3
|
3772 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
|
hekeus@3
|
3773 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3774 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3775 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
|
hekeus@3
|
3776 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3777 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3778 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
|
hekeus@3
|
3779 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3780 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3781 % a control space will come in as a macro
|
hekeus@3
|
3782 % when it is the last one on a line
|
hekeus@3
|
3783 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
|
hekeus@3
|
3784 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
|
hekeus@3
|
3785 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3786 % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
|
hekeus@3
|
3787 % else spit it out and stop gobbling
|
hekeus@3
|
3788 \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
|
hekeus@3
|
3789 \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3790 \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3791
|
hekeus@3
|
3792
|
hekeus@3
|
3793
|
hekeus@3
|
3794
|
hekeus@3
|
3795 % TITLING OF SECTIONS
|
hekeus@3
|
3796 \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are
|
hekeus@3
|
3797 % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
|
hekeus@3
|
3798 % spacing from section number to title
|
hekeus@3
|
3799 % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
|
hekeus@3
|
3800 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3801 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
3802 \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
|
hekeus@3
|
3803 \fi\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3804
|
hekeus@3
|
3805
|
hekeus@3
|
3806 \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3807
|
hekeus@3
|
3808 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3809 % compsoc journals need extra spacing
|
hekeus@3
|
3810 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3811 \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
3812 \fi\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3813
|
hekeus@3
|
3814 %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
|
hekeus@3
|
3815 %and use \@@par rather than \par
|
hekeus@3
|
3816 \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3817 \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
|
hekeus@3
|
3818 \let\@svsec\@empty
|
hekeus@3
|
3819 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3820 \refstepcounter{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3821 % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
|
hekeus@3
|
3822 \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3823 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
3824 \@tempskipa #5\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3825 \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
|
hekeus@3
|
3826 \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
|
hekeus@3
|
3827 \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
|
hekeus@3
|
3828 % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
|
hekeus@3
|
3829 % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
hekeus@3
|
3830 {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3831 \endgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
3832 \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3833 \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3834 \else % printout low level headings
|
hekeus@3
|
3835 % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
hekeus@3
|
3836 % got rid of sectionmark stuff
|
hekeus@3
|
3837 \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3838 \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
|
hekeus@3
|
3839 \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3840 \fi%skip down
|
hekeus@3
|
3841 \@xsect{#5}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3842
|
hekeus@3
|
3843
|
hekeus@3
|
3844 % section* handler
|
hekeus@3
|
3845 %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
|
hekeus@3
|
3846 %and use \@@par rather than \par
|
hekeus@3
|
3847 \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
|
hekeus@3
|
3848 \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
hekeus@3
|
3849 %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
3850 % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
|
hekeus@3
|
3851 \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
3852 % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
|
hekeus@3
|
3853 \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3854 \@xsect{#3}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3855
|
hekeus@3
|
3856
|
hekeus@3
|
3857 %% SECTION heading spacing and font
|
hekeus@3
|
3858 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
3859 % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
|
hekeus@3
|
3860 % (for \@sect) #2 - section level
|
hekeus@3
|
3861 % #3 - section heading indent
|
hekeus@3
|
3862 % #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
|
hekeus@3
|
3863 % If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
|
hekeus@3
|
3864 % #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
|
hekeus@3
|
3865 % negative: amount to indent main text after heading
|
hekeus@3
|
3866 % Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
|
hekeus@3
|
3867 % #6 - font control
|
hekeus@3
|
3868 % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
|
hekeus@3
|
3869 % trouble when you do something like:
|
hekeus@3
|
3870 % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
|
hekeus@3
|
3871 % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
|
hekeus@3
|
3872 % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
|
hekeus@3
|
3873 % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
|
hekeus@3
|
3874 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
hekeus@3
|
3875 % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
|
samer@56
|
3876 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-1.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -0.5ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3877 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
samer@56
|
3878 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-1.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -0.5ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3879 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3880 \else % for journals
|
hekeus@3
|
3881 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
|
hekeus@3
|
3882 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3883 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3884 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3885 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3886
|
hekeus@3
|
3887 % for both journals and conferences
|
hekeus@3
|
3888 % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
|
hekeus@3
|
3889 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3890 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3891 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3892 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3893
|
hekeus@3
|
3894
|
hekeus@3
|
3895 % compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3896 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3897 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
3898 % compsoc conference
|
hekeus@3
|
3899 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3900 {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3901 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3902 {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3903 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3904 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3905 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3906 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3907 \else% compsoc journals
|
hekeus@3
|
3908 % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
|
hekeus@3
|
3909 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3910 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3911 % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
|
hekeus@3
|
3912 % I have to look up an example.
|
hekeus@3
|
3913 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3914 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3915 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3916 {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3917 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3918 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3919 \fi\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3920
|
hekeus@3
|
3921
|
hekeus@3
|
3922
|
hekeus@3
|
3923
|
hekeus@3
|
3924 %% ENVIRONMENTS
|
hekeus@3
|
3925 % "box" symbols at end of proofs
|
hekeus@3
|
3926 \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
|
hekeus@3
|
3927 % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
|
hekeus@3
|
3928 \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3929 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3930 \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
3931 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3932 \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
|
hekeus@3
|
3933 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3934
|
hekeus@3
|
3935 % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
|
hekeus@3
|
3936 % for an optional argument.
|
hekeus@3
|
3937 \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3938 \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
|
hekeus@3
|
3939 \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
|
hekeus@3
|
3940
|
hekeus@3
|
3941
|
hekeus@3
|
3942 %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
|
hekeus@3
|
3943 \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
|
hekeus@3
|
3944 \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
|
hekeus@3
|
3945 \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
|
hekeus@3
|
3946 \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
|
hekeus@3
|
3947 % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
|
hekeus@3
|
3948 % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
|
hekeus@3
|
3949 \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
|
hekeus@3
|
3950 % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
|
hekeus@3
|
3951 % lines below.
|
hekeus@3
|
3952 \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
|
hekeus@3
|
3953
|
hekeus@3
|
3954 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
3955 % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
|
hekeus@3
|
3956 % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
|
hekeus@3
|
3957 % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
|
hekeus@3
|
3958 % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
|
hekeus@3
|
3959 % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
hekeus@3
|
3960 % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
|
hekeus@3
|
3961 %
|
hekeus@3
|
3962 % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
|
hekeus@3
|
3963 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3964 % string macro
|
hekeus@3
|
3965 \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
|
hekeus@3
|
3966
|
hekeus@3
|
3967 % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
|
hekeus@3
|
3968 % if section in_counter is used
|
hekeus@3
|
3969 \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3970 \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
|
hekeus@3
|
3971 {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
|
hekeus@3
|
3972 \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
|
hekeus@3
|
3973 \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
|
hekeus@3
|
3974 \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3975 \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
|
hekeus@3
|
3976 \@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3977 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3978 \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
|
hekeus@3
|
3979 \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
|
hekeus@3
|
3980 \@thmcounter{#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3981 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
3982 \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
3983 \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
3984
|
hekeus@3
|
3985
|
hekeus@3
|
3986
|
hekeus@3
|
3987 %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
|
hekeus@3
|
3988 \ps@headings
|
hekeus@3
|
3989 \pagenumbering{arabic}
|
hekeus@3
|
3990
|
hekeus@3
|
3991 % normally the page counter starts at 1
|
hekeus@3
|
3992 \setcounter{page}{1}
|
hekeus@3
|
3993 % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
|
hekeus@3
|
3994 % (for duplex printing)
|
hekeus@3
|
3995 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
|
hekeus@3
|
3996 \if@twoside
|
hekeus@3
|
3997 \setcounter{page}{-1}
|
hekeus@3
|
3998 \else
|
hekeus@3
|
3999 \setcounter{page}{0}
|
hekeus@3
|
4000 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4001 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4002
|
hekeus@3
|
4003 % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
|
hekeus@3
|
4004 % needed when single sided
|
hekeus@3
|
4005 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4006 % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
|
hekeus@3
|
4007 % enforce a rigid position for the last lines
|
hekeus@3
|
4008 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
4009 % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
4010 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
hekeus@3
|
4011 \twocolumn
|
hekeus@3
|
4012 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4013 \sloppy
|
hekeus@3
|
4014 \flushbottom
|
hekeus@3
|
4015 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4016
|
hekeus@3
|
4017
|
hekeus@3
|
4018
|
hekeus@3
|
4019
|
hekeus@3
|
4020 % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
|
hekeus@3
|
4021
|
hekeus@3
|
4022 % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
|
hekeus@3
|
4023 % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
|
hekeus@3
|
4024 % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
|
hekeus@3
|
4025 % is present or not.
|
hekeus@3
|
4026 % For instance:
|
hekeus@3
|
4027 % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4028 % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
|
hekeus@3
|
4029 % \appendices is invoked.
|
hekeus@3
|
4030 % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
|
hekeus@3
|
4031 % on whether the user specifies a title:
|
hekeus@3
|
4032 % \section{My appendix title}
|
hekeus@3
|
4033 % or not:
|
hekeus@3
|
4034 % \section{}
|
hekeus@3
|
4035 % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
|
hekeus@3
|
4036 % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
|
hekeus@3
|
4037 % contents
|
hekeus@3
|
4038 \begingroup
|
hekeus@3
|
4039 \catcode`\Q=3
|
hekeus@3
|
4040 \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
|
hekeus@3
|
4041 \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
|
hekeus@3
|
4042 \endgroup
|
hekeus@3
|
4043 % end of \@ifmtarg defs
|
hekeus@3
|
4044
|
hekeus@3
|
4045
|
hekeus@3
|
4046 % V1.7
|
hekeus@3
|
4047 % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
|
hekeus@3
|
4048 % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
|
hekeus@3
|
4049 % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
|
hekeus@3
|
4050 % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
|
hekeus@3
|
4051 \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
|
hekeus@3
|
4052 \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4053
|
hekeus@3
|
4054 % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
|
hekeus@3
|
4055 % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
|
hekeus@3
|
4056 % argument (title)
|
hekeus@3
|
4057 % note we reroute the call to the old \section*
|
hekeus@3
|
4058 \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4059 \@ifmtarg{#1}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4060 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4061 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4062 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4063 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4064
|
hekeus@3
|
4065 % we use this if the user calls \section{} after
|
hekeus@3
|
4066 % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
|
hekeus@3
|
4067 % command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
|
hekeus@3
|
4068 \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
|
hekeus@3
|
4069 \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4070
|
hekeus@3
|
4071
|
hekeus@3
|
4072 % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
|
hekeus@3
|
4073 % and in the Table of Contents.
|
hekeus@3
|
4074 % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
|
hekeus@3
|
4075
|
hekeus@3
|
4076 % appendix command for one single appendix
|
hekeus@3
|
4077 % normally has no heading. However, if you want a
|
hekeus@3
|
4078 % heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
|
hekeus@3
|
4079 % \appendix[Optional Heading]
|
hekeus@3
|
4080 \def\appendix{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4081 \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
hekeus@3
|
4082 % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
hekeus@3
|
4083 \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4084 % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
hekeus@3
|
4085 \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4086 \setcounter{section}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4087 \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4088 \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4089 \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4090 \gdef\thesection{A}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4091 \gdef\thesectiondis{}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4092 \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4093 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
|
hekeus@3
|
4094 \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
hekeus@3
|
4095 \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4096 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4097 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4098 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4099 % redefine \section command for appendix
|
hekeus@3
|
4100 % leave \section* as is
|
hekeus@3
|
4101 \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4102 \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
|
hekeus@3
|
4103 % of the normal form
|
hekeus@3
|
4104 }
|
hekeus@3
|
4105
|
hekeus@3
|
4106
|
hekeus@3
|
4107
|
hekeus@3
|
4108 % appendices command for multiple appendices
|
hekeus@3
|
4109 % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
|
hekeus@3
|
4110 % declare the individual appendices
|
hekeus@3
|
4111 \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
|
hekeus@3
|
4112 % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
|
hekeus@3
|
4113 \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4114 % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
|
hekeus@3
|
4115 \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4116 \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
|
hekeus@3
|
4117 \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4118 \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4119 \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4120 \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
|
hekeus@3
|
4121 \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4122 \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4123 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4124 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4125 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
4126 \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4127 \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4128 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4129 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4130 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4131 \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
|
hekeus@3
|
4132 \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
|
hekeus@3
|
4133 % redefine \section command for appendices
|
hekeus@3
|
4134 % leave \section* as is
|
hekeus@3
|
4135 \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
|
hekeus@3
|
4136 \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
|
hekeus@3
|
4137 \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
|
hekeus@3
|
4138 % of the normal form
|
hekeus@3
|
4139 }
|
hekeus@3
|
4140
|
hekeus@3
|
4141
|
hekeus@3
|
4142
|
hekeus@3
|
4143 % \IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4144 % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
|
hekeus@3
|
4145 % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4146 % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
|
hekeus@3
|
4147 % first word which will be rendered in upper case.
|
hekeus@3
|
4148 % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
|
hekeus@3
|
4149 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4150 % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
|
hekeus@3
|
4151 % within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
|
hekeus@3
|
4152 % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
|
hekeus@3
|
4153 % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
|
hekeus@3
|
4154 % interword glue will now work as normal.
|
hekeus@3
|
4155 % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
|
hekeus@3
|
4156 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4157 % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
|
hekeus@3
|
4158 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4159 % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
|
hekeus@3
|
4160 % to change the font style.
|
hekeus@3
|
4161 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4162 % the number of lines that are indented to clear it
|
hekeus@3
|
4163 % may need to increase if using decenders
|
hekeus@3
|
4164 \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
|
hekeus@3
|
4165 % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4166 % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
|
hekeus@3
|
4167 % be overly cautious
|
hekeus@3
|
4168 \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
|
hekeus@3
|
4169 % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
|
hekeus@3
|
4170 % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
|
hekeus@3
|
4171 \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
|
hekeus@3
|
4172 % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
|
hekeus@3
|
4173 % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
|
hekeus@3
|
4174 % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
|
hekeus@3
|
4175 % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
4176 % so that it can respond to changes therein.
|
hekeus@3
|
4177 \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
4178 % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
|
hekeus@3
|
4179 % can take zero or one argument.
|
hekeus@3
|
4180 \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
|
hekeus@3
|
4181 % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
hekeus@3
|
4182 % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
|
hekeus@3
|
4183 \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
|
hekeus@3
|
4184 % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
|
hekeus@3
|
4185 % can take zero or one argument.
|
hekeus@3
|
4186 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4187 % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
|
hekeus@3
|
4188 % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
|
hekeus@3
|
4189 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
|
hekeus@3
|
4190 % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
|
hekeus@3
|
4191 % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
|
hekeus@3
|
4192 % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
|
hekeus@3
|
4193 \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
|
hekeus@3
|
4194 % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
|
hekeus@3
|
4195 \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
|
hekeus@3
|
4196 % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
|
hekeus@3
|
4197 \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
|
hekeus@3
|
4198
|
hekeus@3
|
4199 % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
|
hekeus@3
|
4200 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
4201 \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
|
hekeus@3
|
4202 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
|
hekeus@3
|
4203 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4204 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4205
|
hekeus@3
|
4206 % definition of \IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4207 % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
|
hekeus@3
|
4208 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4209 % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
|
hekeus@3
|
4210 % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4211 % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
|
hekeus@3
|
4212 % argument is the rest of the first word(s).
|
hekeus@3
|
4213 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4214 % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
hekeus@3
|
4215 % on a new one
|
hekeus@3
|
4216 \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4217 % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
|
hekeus@3
|
4218 % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
|
hekeus@3
|
4219 \noindent
|
hekeus@3
|
4220 % calculate the desired height of the big letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4221 % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
|
hekeus@3
|
4222 % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
|
hekeus@3
|
4223 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4224 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4225 % extract the name of the current font in bold
|
hekeus@3
|
4226 % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
|
hekeus@3
|
4227 \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4228 {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4229 \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4230 % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
|
hekeus@3
|
4231 % height of the drop letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4232 \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
4233 % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
|
hekeus@3
|
4234 \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
hekeus@3
|
4235 % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
|
hekeus@3
|
4236 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4237 % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
|
hekeus@3
|
4238 % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
|
hekeus@3
|
4239 \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
4240 \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4241 \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4242 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
|
hekeus@3
|
4243 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4244 % and store it as a counter
|
hekeus@3
|
4245 \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
hekeus@3
|
4246 % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
|
hekeus@3
|
4247 % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
|
hekeus@3
|
4248 % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
|
hekeus@3
|
4249 % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
hekeus@3
|
4250 % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
|
hekeus@3
|
4251 % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
|
hekeus@3
|
4252 % division. Hence the use of the counters.
|
hekeus@3
|
4253 % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
|
hekeus@3
|
4254 % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
|
hekeus@3
|
4255 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
|
hekeus@3
|
4256 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
|
hekeus@3
|
4257 % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
|
hekeus@3
|
4258 % floating point values
|
hekeus@3
|
4259 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
|
hekeus@3
|
4260 \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
hekeus@3
|
4261 % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4262 % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
|
hekeus@3
|
4263 % big letter.
|
hekeus@3
|
4264 \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
|
hekeus@3
|
4265 % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4266 % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
|
hekeus@3
|
4267 % hanging indent
|
hekeus@3
|
4268 \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
|
hekeus@3
|
4269 \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4270 % end of the isolated calculation environment
|
hekeus@3
|
4271 % add in the extra clearance we want
|
hekeus@3
|
4272 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
4273 % add in the optional offset
|
hekeus@3
|
4274 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
|
hekeus@3
|
4275 % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
|
hekeus@3
|
4276 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
|
hekeus@3
|
4277 \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4278 % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
|
hekeus@3
|
4279 % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
|
hekeus@3
|
4280 % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
|
hekeus@3
|
4281 % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
|
hekeus@3
|
4282 % text won't be displaced by it.
|
hekeus@3
|
4283 \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
|
hekeus@3
|
4284 \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4285 \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4286 \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4287 \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4288 {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4289
|
hekeus@3
|
4290
|
hekeus@3
|
4291
|
hekeus@3
|
4292
|
hekeus@3
|
4293
|
hekeus@3
|
4294
|
hekeus@3
|
4295 % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
|
hekeus@3
|
4296 % than the specified space of argument one
|
hekeus@3
|
4297 % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
|
hekeus@3
|
4298 % and issue a \newpage
|
hekeus@3
|
4299 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4300 % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
|
hekeus@3
|
4301 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4302 % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
|
hekeus@3
|
4303 % be overly cautious
|
hekeus@3
|
4304 % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
|
hekeus@3
|
4305 % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
|
hekeus@3
|
4306 % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
|
hekeus@3
|
4307 % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
|
hekeus@3
|
4308 \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
|
hekeus@3
|
4309 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
|
hekeus@3
|
4310 \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
|
hekeus@3
|
4311 \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4312 \newpage%
|
hekeus@3
|
4313 \fi\endgroup}
|
hekeus@3
|
4314
|
hekeus@3
|
4315
|
hekeus@3
|
4316
|
hekeus@3
|
4317 % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
|
hekeus@3
|
4318 % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
|
hekeus@3
|
4319 % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
|
hekeus@3
|
4320 % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
|
hekeus@3
|
4321 % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
|
hekeus@3
|
4322 % MDS 7/2001
|
hekeus@3
|
4323 % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
|
hekeus@3
|
4324 \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
|
hekeus@3
|
4325 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4326
|
hekeus@3
|
4327 % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
|
hekeus@3
|
4328 % and not just the previous section
|
hekeus@3
|
4329 \newcounter{IEEEbiography}
|
hekeus@3
|
4330 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
|
hekeus@3
|
4331
|
hekeus@3
|
4332 % photo area size
|
hekeus@3
|
4333 \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area
|
hekeus@3
|
4334 \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area
|
hekeus@3
|
4335 % area cleared for photo
|
hekeus@3
|
4336 \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area
|
hekeus@3
|
4337 \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area
|
hekeus@3
|
4338 % actual depth will be a multiple of
|
hekeus@3
|
4339 % \baselineskip, rounded up
|
hekeus@3
|
4340 \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
|
hekeus@3
|
4341
|
hekeus@3
|
4342 \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
|
hekeus@3
|
4343 \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
|
hekeus@3
|
4344 % we need enough space to support the hanging indent
|
hekeus@3
|
4345 % the nominal value of the spacer
|
hekeus@3
|
4346 % and one extra line for good measure
|
hekeus@3
|
4347 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
hekeus@3
|
4348 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
|
hekeus@3
|
4349 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
4350 % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
|
hekeus@3
|
4351 % with a new one
|
hekeus@3
|
4352 \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4353 % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
|
hekeus@3
|
4354 \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
4355 % the default box for where the photo goes
|
hekeus@3
|
4356 \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4357 \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4358 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4359 % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
|
hekeus@3
|
4360 % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
|
hekeus@3
|
4361 % and if so, override the default box with what they want
|
hekeus@3
|
4362 \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4363 \centering%
|
hekeus@3
|
4364 #1%
|
hekeus@3
|
4365 \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
|
hekeus@3
|
4366 % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
hekeus@3
|
4367 \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
hekeus@3
|
4368 % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
hekeus@3
|
4369 % to the biography, not the previous section
|
hekeus@3
|
4370 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4371 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4372 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4373 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
4374 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4375 % one more biography
|
hekeus@3
|
4376 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4377 % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
hekeus@3
|
4378 \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4379 % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
|
hekeus@3
|
4380 % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
|
hekeus@3
|
4381 % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
|
hekeus@3
|
4382 % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
|
hekeus@3
|
4383 \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
|
hekeus@3
|
4384 \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
|
hekeus@3
|
4385 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
|
hekeus@3
|
4386 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
|
hekeus@3
|
4387 \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
|
hekeus@3
|
4388 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
|
hekeus@3
|
4389 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
|
hekeus@3
|
4390 % set the hanging indent
|
hekeus@3
|
4391 \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
|
hekeus@3
|
4392 \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
hekeus@3
|
4393 % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
|
hekeus@3
|
4394 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4395 % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
|
hekeus@3
|
4396 \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4397 \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4398 % now place the author name and begin the bio text
|
hekeus@3
|
4399 \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
4400 % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
|
hekeus@3
|
4401 % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
|
hekeus@3
|
4402 % MDS
|
hekeus@3
|
4403 \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
|
hekeus@3
|
4404 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
|
hekeus@3
|
4405 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
|
hekeus@3
|
4406 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
|
hekeus@3
|
4407 \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
|
hekeus@3
|
4408 \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
|
hekeus@3
|
4409 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4410 \par\normalfont}
|
hekeus@3
|
4411
|
hekeus@3
|
4412
|
hekeus@3
|
4413
|
hekeus@3
|
4414 % V1.6
|
hekeus@3
|
4415 % added biography without a photo environment
|
hekeus@3
|
4416 \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4417 % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
|
hekeus@3
|
4418 \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
|
hekeus@3
|
4419 % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
|
hekeus@3
|
4420 % to the biography, not the previous section
|
hekeus@3
|
4421 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4422 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4423 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4424 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
4425 \fi%
|
hekeus@3
|
4426 % one more biography
|
hekeus@3
|
4427 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4428 % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
|
hekeus@3
|
4429 \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4430 \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
|
hekeus@3
|
4431 \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
|
hekeus@3
|
4432 \parskip=0pt\par%
|
hekeus@3
|
4433 \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
|
hekeus@3
|
4434
|
hekeus@3
|
4435
|
hekeus@3
|
4436 % provide the user with some old font commands
|
hekeus@3
|
4437 % got this from article.cls
|
hekeus@3
|
4438 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
|
hekeus@3
|
4439 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
|
hekeus@3
|
4440 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
|
hekeus@3
|
4441 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
|
hekeus@3
|
4442 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
|
hekeus@3
|
4443 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
|
hekeus@3
|
4444 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
|
hekeus@3
|
4445 \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
|
hekeus@3
|
4446 \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
|
hekeus@3
|
4447
|
hekeus@3
|
4448
|
hekeus@3
|
4449 % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
|
hekeus@3
|
4450 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4451 % holds the special notice text
|
hekeus@3
|
4452 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4453
|
hekeus@3
|
4454 % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
|
hekeus@3
|
4455 % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
|
hekeus@3
|
4456 \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
|
hekeus@3
|
4457 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4458 \else%
|
hekeus@3
|
4459 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4460 \fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
4461
|
hekeus@3
|
4462
|
hekeus@3
|
4463
|
hekeus@3
|
4464
|
hekeus@3
|
4465 % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
|
hekeus@3
|
4466 % to insert a publisher's ID footer
|
hekeus@3
|
4467 % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
|
hekeus@3
|
4468 % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
|
hekeus@3
|
4469 % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
|
hekeus@3
|
4470 % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
|
hekeus@3
|
4471 % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
|
hekeus@3
|
4472 % names and the maintext.
|
hekeus@3
|
4473 %
|
hekeus@3
|
4474 % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
|
hekeus@3
|
4475 % publisher's ID footer
|
hekeus@3
|
4476 % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
|
hekeus@3
|
4477 % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
|
hekeus@3
|
4478 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
4479 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
hekeus@3
|
4480 % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
|
hekeus@3
|
4481 % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
|
hekeus@3
|
4482 % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
|
hekeus@3
|
4483 % second column
|
hekeus@3
|
4484 % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
|
hekeus@3
|
4485 % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
|
hekeus@3
|
4486 % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
|
hekeus@3
|
4487 % and call it even.
|
hekeus@3
|
4488 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
|
hekeus@3
|
4489 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4490
|
hekeus@3
|
4491 % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
|
hekeus@3
|
4492 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
4493 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
|
hekeus@3
|
4494 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4495
|
hekeus@3
|
4496 % holds the ID text
|
hekeus@3
|
4497 \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4498
|
hekeus@3
|
4499 % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
|
hekeus@3
|
4500 \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4501 \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
|
hekeus@3
|
4502 % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
|
hekeus@3
|
4503 % V1.6 use before \maketitle
|
hekeus@3
|
4504 \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
|
hekeus@3
|
4505
|
hekeus@3
|
4506
|
hekeus@3
|
4507 % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
|
hekeus@3
|
4508 % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
|
hekeus@3
|
4509 % the title page when using \IEEEpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4510 % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
|
hekeus@3
|
4511 % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4512 % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
|
hekeus@3
|
4513 % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
|
hekeus@3
|
4514 % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
|
hekeus@3
|
4515 % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
|
hekeus@3
|
4516 % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
|
hekeus@3
|
4517 % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
|
hekeus@3
|
4518 \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
|
hekeus@3
|
4519 \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
hekeus@3
|
4520
|
hekeus@3
|
4521 % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
|
hekeus@3
|
4522 % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
|
hekeus@3
|
4523 % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
|
hekeus@3
|
4524
|
hekeus@3
|
4525
|
hekeus@3
|
4526
|
hekeus@3
|
4527 %% Lockout some commands under various conditions
|
hekeus@3
|
4528
|
hekeus@3
|
4529 % general purpose bit bucket
|
hekeus@3
|
4530 \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
|
hekeus@3
|
4531
|
hekeus@3
|
4532 % flags to prevent multiple warning messages
|
hekeus@3
|
4533 \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
|
hekeus@3
|
4534 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4535 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4536 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
|
hekeus@3
|
4537 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4538 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
|
hekeus@3
|
4539 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
|
hekeus@3
|
4540 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
|
hekeus@3
|
4541 \@IEEEWARNthankstrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4542 \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4543 \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4544 \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4545 \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4546 \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4547 \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4548 \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
|
hekeus@3
|
4549
|
hekeus@3
|
4550
|
hekeus@3
|
4551 %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
4552 %%
|
hekeus@3
|
4553 % save commands which might be locked out
|
hekeus@3
|
4554 % so that the user can later restore them if needed
|
hekeus@3
|
4555 \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
4556 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4557 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4558 \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4559 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
hekeus@3
|
4560 \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
|
hekeus@3
|
4561 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4562 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
hekeus@3
|
4563 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
|
hekeus@3
|
4564 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
|
hekeus@3
|
4565
|
hekeus@3
|
4566
|
hekeus@3
|
4567 % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
|
hekeus@3
|
4568 % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
|
hekeus@3
|
4569 % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
|
hekeus@3
|
4570 % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
|
hekeus@3
|
4571 % paper.
|
hekeus@3
|
4572 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
|
hekeus@3
|
4573 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4574 is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4575 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4576 % and for technotes
|
hekeus@3
|
4577 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
|
hekeus@3
|
4578 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4579 is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4580 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4581
|
hekeus@3
|
4582
|
hekeus@3
|
4583 % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
|
hekeus@3
|
4584 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
|
hekeus@3
|
4585 % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
|
hekeus@3
|
4586 % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
|
hekeus@3
|
4587 % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
|
hekeus@3
|
4588 % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
|
hekeus@3
|
4589 % from filling up with redundant messages
|
hekeus@3
|
4590 \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
|
hekeus@3
|
4591 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4592 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
|
hekeus@3
|
4593 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4594
|
hekeus@3
|
4595
|
hekeus@3
|
4596 % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
|
hekeus@3
|
4597 % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
|
hekeus@3
|
4598 % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
|
hekeus@3
|
4599 % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
|
hekeus@3
|
4600 % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
|
hekeus@3
|
4601 % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
|
hekeus@3
|
4602 % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
|
hekeus@3
|
4603 % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
|
hekeus@3
|
4604 % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
|
hekeus@3
|
4605 % name can be left undisturbed.
|
hekeus@3
|
4606 \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4607 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
4608 \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4609 % and make biography point to our bogus biography
|
hekeus@3
|
4610 \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4611 \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
|
hekeus@3
|
4612
|
hekeus@3
|
4613 \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
|
hekeus@3
|
4614 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
|
hekeus@3
|
4615 \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
|
hekeus@3
|
4616
|
hekeus@3
|
4617 \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
|
hekeus@3
|
4618 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4619 \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
|
hekeus@3
|
4620 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4621 \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
|
hekeus@3
|
4622 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4623 \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
|
hekeus@3
|
4624 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
|
hekeus@3
|
4625 \fi
|
hekeus@3
|
4626
|
hekeus@3
|
4627
|
hekeus@3
|
4628 % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
|
hekeus@3
|
4629 \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4630 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4631 \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
|
hekeus@3
|
4632 \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
|
hekeus@3
|
4633 \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
|
hekeus@3
|
4634 \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
|
hekeus@3
|
4635 \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
hekeus@3
|
4636 \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
|
hekeus@3
|
4637 \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
|
hekeus@3
|
4638 \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
|
hekeus@3
|
4639 \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
|
hekeus@3
|
4640 \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
|
hekeus@3
|
4641
|
hekeus@3
|
4642
|
hekeus@3
|
4643
|
hekeus@3
|
4644 % need a backslash character for typeout output
|
hekeus@3
|
4645 {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
|
hekeus@3
|
4646 |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4647
|
hekeus@3
|
4648
|
hekeus@3
|
4649 % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
|
hekeus@3
|
4650 \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
|
hekeus@3
|
4651 Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4652
|
hekeus@3
|
4653
|
hekeus@3
|
4654 % provide for legacy commands
|
hekeus@3
|
4655 \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
|
hekeus@3
|
4656 \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
|
hekeus@3
|
4657 \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
|
hekeus@3
|
4658 \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
|
hekeus@3
|
4659 \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
|
hekeus@3
|
4660 \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
|
hekeus@3
|
4661 \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
|
hekeus@3
|
4662 \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
|
hekeus@3
|
4663 \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
|
hekeus@3
|
4664 \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
|
hekeus@3
|
4665
|
hekeus@3
|
4666
|
hekeus@3
|
4667
|
hekeus@3
|
4668 % provide for legacy environments
|
hekeus@3
|
4669 \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
|
hekeus@3
|
4670 \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
|
hekeus@3
|
4671 \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
|
hekeus@3
|
4672 \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
|
hekeus@3
|
4673 \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
|
hekeus@3
|
4674 \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
|
hekeus@3
|
4675
|
hekeus@3
|
4676
|
hekeus@3
|
4677 % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
|
hekeus@3
|
4678 \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
|
hekeus@3
|
4679 \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
|
hekeus@3
|
4680 \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
|
hekeus@3
|
4681 \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
|
hekeus@3
|
4682 \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
|
hekeus@3
|
4683 \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
|
hekeus@3
|
4684 \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
|
hekeus@3
|
4685
|
hekeus@3
|
4686
|
hekeus@3
|
4687
|
hekeus@3
|
4688 % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
|
hekeus@3
|
4689 % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
|
hekeus@3
|
4690 \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4691
|
hekeus@3
|
4692 % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
|
hekeus@3
|
4693 \def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
|
hekeus@3
|
4694 \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
|
hekeus@3
|
4695 \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
|
hekeus@3
|
4696
|
hekeus@3
|
4697
|
hekeus@3
|
4698 \endinput
|
hekeus@3
|
4699
|
hekeus@3
|
4700 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
hekeus@3
|
4701 % That's all folks!
|
hekeus@3
|
4702
|